VersaLink C405 Service Manual
VersaLink C405 Service Manual
February 2017
© 2017 Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved. Xerox®, Xerox, Design® and VersaLink® are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Other company trademarks are also acknowledged.
While every care has been taken in the preparation of this manual, no liability will be accepted by Xerox Europe arising out of any inaccuracies or omissions.
All service documentation is supplied to Xerox external customers for informational purposes only. Xerox service documentation is intended for use by certified, product trained service per-
sonnel only. Xerox does not warrant or represent that it will notify or provide to such customer any future change to this documentation. Customer performed service of equipment, or
modules, components or parts of such equipment may affect whether Xerox is responsible to fix machine defects under the warranty offered by Xerox with respect to such equipment. You
should consult the applicable warranty for its terms regarding customer or third-party provided service.
Introduction
About This Manual .......................................................................................................... iii
How To Use This Manual ................................................................................................ iii
Change History ............................................................................................................... iv
Service Safety Summary................................................................................................. iv
Symbols Used On The Product....................................................................................... vii
Voltage Measurement and Specifications....................................................................... viii
Health and Safety Incident Reporting ............................................................................. ix
Regulatory Specifications................................................................................................ x
Translation of Warnings .................................................................................................. xi
VersaLink® C400 and C405 Overview ........................................................................... xiv
Consumables and Maintenance...................................................................................... xvi
Product Codes, Configuration and Serial Number Range ............................................. xvii
Section 4 Repairs/Adjustments
This section contains the instructions for removal, replacement, and adjustment of parts within CAUTION
the device. A caution is used whenever an operation or maintenance procedure, practice, condition or
statement, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to the equipment.
Section 5 Parts List
This section contains the illustrated spare parts list. Any part that is spared or that must be NOTE: A note appears to highlight a procedure, practice, condition or statement.
removed to access a spared part is illustrated. Service Acronyms
Section 6 General Procedures / Information While using this service documentation, you may encounter acronyms that are unfamiliar.
This section contains all other procedures, product specifications and general information.
To find definitions for Xerox acronyms, go to the following page in your web browser, then
enter the acronym and click Search:
Section 7 Wiring Data
This section contains the wiring diagrams. https://open.xerox.com/Services/acronym
Component Names
Names of parts that appear in the disassembly procedures may not be exactly the same as the
names that appear on the part or listed in the parts lists. For example; a part called the registra-
tion chute assembly may appear on the parts list as Assembly, Chute REGI.
Avoid servicing alone: Do not perform internal service or adjustment of this product unless
another person capable of rendering first aid or resuscitation is present.
Use care when servicing with power applied: Dangerous voltages may exist at several points in
this product. To avoid personal injury, do not touch exposed connections and components
while power is on. Disconnect power before removing the power supply shield or replacing
components.
Do not wear jewelry: Remove jewelry prior to servicing. Rings, necklaces and other metallic
objects could come into contact with dangerous voltages and currents.
Electrical Safety
• Use the Power Cord supplied with the printer.
• Plug the Power Cord directly into a correctly grounded electrical outlet.
• Do not use a ground adapter plug to connect the printer to an electrical outlet that does
not have a ground connection terminal.
• Do not use an extension cord or power strip.
• Do not place the system in an area where people might step on the power cord.
• Do not place objects on the power cord.
• Do not block ventilation openings. These openings prevent printer overheating.
• Do not drop paper clips or staples into the printer.
Operational Safety
The printer and supplies were designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements. These
include safety agency examination, approval, and compliance with established environmental
standards.
Pay attention to these safety guidelines to ensure the continued, safe operation of the printer.
• Use the supplies specifically designed for your system. The use of unsuitable materials
may cause poor performance and a possible safety hazard.
• Follow all warnings and instructions marked on, or supplied with, the system, options and
supplies.
NOTE: The Total Satisfaction Guarantee is available in the United States and Canada. Cover-
age may vary outside these areas; please contact your local representative for details.
Maintenance Safety
• Do not attempt maintenance not specifically described in the printer documentation.
• Do not use aerosol cleaners. The use of supplies that are not approved may cause poor
performance and could create a hazardous condition.
• Do not burn any consumable or routine maintenance items. For information on Xerox sup-
plies recycling programs, go to www.xerox.com/gwa.
C405 C400
Rear interlock switch Rear interlock switch
Safety System
• At the close of a service call ensure all covers are in place and all interlock switches are
functioning correctly. If you bypass an interlock switch, use extreme caution when work-
ing on or around the printer. Figure 2 shows the safety interlock circuitry.
Figure 6 is the symbol to use caution (or draws attention to a particular component). Refer to
the manual for information.
Figure 7 is the symbol indicating that the item is sensitive and should not be touched.
Figure 3 is the symbol indicating a hot surface. Use caution to avoid personal injury.
Figure 8 is the symbol indicating the item is sensitive to sunlight, and exposure to it will reduce
its life span.
Figure 3 Hot surface symbol
Figure 4 is the symbol indicating that the surface is hot while the printer is running. After turning
off the power, wait 30 minutes.
Figure 9 is the symbol indicating the item is sensitive to any light, and exposure to it will reduce
its life span.
Figure 5 is the symbol indicating where avoid pinching fingers in the printer. Use caution to
avoid personal injury.
In this example, the red meter lead would be placed on P/J7 and the black lead on P/J68.
If a second test point is not given, it is assumed that the black meter lead may be attached to
chassis ground.
III. Objective
To enable prompt resolution of health and safety incidents involving Xerox products and to
ensure Xerox regulatory compliance.
IV. Definitions
Incident:
An event or condition occurring in a customer account that has resulted in injury, illness or
property damage. Examples of incidents include device fires, smoke generation, physical
injury to an operator or service representative. Alleged events and product conditions are
included in this definition.
V. Requirements
Initial Report:
1. Xerox organizations shall establish a process for individuals to report product incidents to
Xerox Environment Health & Safety within 24 hours of becoming aware of the event.
2. The information to be provided at the time of reporting is contained in Appendix A (Health
and Safety Incident Report involving a Xerox product).
3. The initial notification may be made by the method that follows:
• Email Xerox EH&S at: usa.product.incident@xerox.com.
• Fax Xerox EH&S at: 1-585-422-8217 (intelnet 8*222-8217).
NOTE: If sending a fax, please also send the original via internal mail.
Xerox has tested this product to electromagnetic emission and immunity standards. These
A signed copy of the Declaration of Conformity for this product can be obtained from Xerox.
standards are designed to mitigate interference caused or received by this product in a typical
office environment.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment Off and On, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
Canada (Regulations)
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
European Union
Table 1 CE Mark
This product, if used correctly in accordance with the user's instructions, is neither dangerous
for the consumer nor for the environment.
AVVERTENZA: Spegnere la macchina. Scollegare il cavo di alimentazione dall'alimenta- VORSICHT: Bei Arbeiten in folgenden Bereichen besondere Vorsicht walten lassen.
Einige der Komponenten sind elektrisch aufgeladen und können bei Berührung einen
tore quando si eseguono attività che non richiedono elettricità. L'elettricità può causare
Stromschlag und körperliche Verletzung verursachen
morte o lesioni personali. Le parti in movimento possono causare lesioni personali.
AVISO: Tenga mucho cuidado al trabajar en el área siguiente. Algunos de los compo-
VORSICHT: Schalten Sie die Stromversorgung der Maschine ab. Ziehen Sie das Stromk-
abel ab, wenn Sie Aufgaben ausführen, für die keine Stromversorgung benötigt wird. nentes están cargados eléctricamente y podrían producir descargas y lesiones, si se
tocan
Stromschläge können Todesfällen oder Verletzungen verursachen. Bewegliche Teile
können zu Verletzungen führen.
AVISO: Apague la electricidad de la máquina. Desconecte el cable de alimentación eléc-
trica de la toma de pared mientras esté realizando tareas que no necesiten corriente. La
electricidad puede causar daños o la muerte. Las partes móviles pueden causar daños.
WARNING
Do not work in a confined space. 1 m (39 inches) space is needed for safe working.
DANGER : Ne pas travailler dans un espace restreint. 1 mètre d'espace est nécessaire
pour un dépannage en toute sécurité.
WARNING AVVERTENZA: Non lavorare in uno spazio limitato; è necessario uno spazio di almeno
Perform the steps in the following procedure carefully. Failure to follow this procedure un metro attorno alla macchina per la sicurezza dell'operatore.
carefully could result in electrical shock and personal injury. VORSICHT: Nur mit ausreichendem Bewegungsspielraum (1 m) arbeiten.
DANGER: Faire très attention en effectuant les étapes de la procédure suivante. Si cette AVISO: No trabaje en un espacio reducido. Se necesita 1 metro de espacio para trabajar
procédure n'est pas strictement respectée, il y a des risques d'électrocution et d'autres con seguridad.
blessures.
AVVERTENZA: Si prega eseguire attentamente la seguente procedura. Omettere di
eseguire attentamente la procedura indicata può provocare forti scosse e gravi ferite.
VORSICHT: Befolgen Sie die Schritte der folgenden Anleitung genau. Die Nichtbefol-
gung dieser Anweisungen kann elektrischen Schlag oder andere Körperverletzungen WARNING
zur Folge haben. Mandatory safety warning. This procedure must be performed by 2 people. The module
AVISO: Lleve a cabo los pasos del procedimiento siguiente con mucho cuidado. No is heavy.
seguir este procedimiento cuidadosamente puede ocasionar una descarga eléctrica y DANGER: Avertissement obligatoire. Cette procédure doit être effectuée par 2 per-
lesiones personales sonnes. Le module est très lourd.
AVVERTENZA: Avviso di sicurezza obbligatorio. A causa della pesantezza del modulo,
questa procedura deve essere eseguita da due persone.
VORSICHT: Verbindliche Sicherheitsvorschrift - dieser Vorgang muss von zwei Per-
sonen ausgeführt werden, da das Modul sehr schwer ist.
AVISO: Aviso de seguridad obligatorio. Este procedimiento debe ejecutarse entre dos
personas. El módulo pesa mucho.
For updates to the Service Manual, Service Bulletins, knowledge base, etc., go to:
• Xerox Global Service Net - https://www.xrxgsn.com/secure/main.p
For further technical support, contact your assigned Xerox Technical Support for this product.
Standard Orientation
Figure 1 and Figure 2 shows the standard orientation for the C400 and C405 respectively.
Directional descriptions used in the procedures are defined as follows:
• Front: Direction toward you when facing the front of the printer.
• Rear: Direction opposite to the front when facing the front of the printer.
• Left: Left-hand direction when facing the front of the printer.
• Right: Right-hand direction when facing the front of the printer.
Left Rear
Left
Right
Right
Front
Front
Each toner cartridge (except starter cartridges) has a CRUM (Customer Replaceable Unit
Monitor) to record regional and toner usage information. The CRUM maintains a count of the
amount of toner consumed. When the count reaches set values, warning and error messages Transfer roller
assembly
appear to notify the user when near and end of life status is reached.
Like the toner cartridges, each imaging unit has a CRUM to maintain a page count. When the
count reaches a set value, warning and error messages appear to notify the user that the
Imaging Unit has reached near or end of life status.
The life ratings for the C400 and C405 consumables are shown in Table 1. All values are cor- Waste
rect at the time of product release. For the most current values, go to www.xerox.com. Cartridge
Toner cartridges
Table 1 Consumable life expectancy
Consumable Capacity
CMYK Standard Capacity Toner Cartridges 2,500 color
2,500 Black
CMYK High Capacity Toner Cartridges sold cartridges 4,800 color
5,000 black
metered cartridges 8,000 color
10,500 black
CMYK Extra High Capacity Toner Cartridges sold cartridges 8,000 color
Cassette retard holder assembly
10,500 black Imaging Units
and feed roll
CMYK CRU xerographic development assembly 60,000
Waste Cartridge 30,000
Figure 1 C400 Maintenance items
1. Take note of problems, error messages or error codes. If necessary, refer to GP 2 Fault 5. Before switching off the machine or clearing the memory, check for a customer job in the
Codes and History Files. memory.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 6. Check and record the total impressions usage counter. If the usage counters are reset
3. Ask the operator to describe or demonstrate the problem. during the call, refer to dC132 Machine ID and Billing Data.
4. If the problem is the result of an incorrect action by the operator, refer the operator to the 7. Go to SCP 3 Fault Analysis.
user documentation.
5. Check the steps that follow:
a. The power lead is connected to the wall outlet and to the machine.
b. Documents are not loaded in the DADF or on the document glass.
c. The paper is loaded correctly.
d. All paper trays are closed.
e. All doors are closed.
f. If telephone line cables are installed, ensure that the cable is connected between the
line socket and the wall jack.
g. If a telephone line cable is installed, ensure that the customer telephone line is func-
tioning.
6. Check the machine service log book for previous actions that are related to this call.
7. Go to SCP 2 Call Actions.
For unresolved faults that occur during start up of the device, refer to OF 6 Power On Self Test.
Additional Information
If necessary, refer to the following general procedures and information:
• GP 1 Service Diagnostics Entry and Exit
• GP 2 Fault Codes and History Logs
• GP 3 Administrator Log In
• GP 4 How to Switch Off or Switch On the Printer
• GP 5 Miscellaneous Checks
• GP 6 Electrostatic Discharge Prevention
• GP 7 Device Specifications
• GP 8 General Disassembly Precautions
• GP 9 Device Software
• GP 10 How to Check a Motor
• GP 11 How to Check a Sensor
• GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch
• GP 13 How to Check a Switch
• GP 14 Cloning Network Configurations
• GP 15 Obtaining Audit and Device Logs
• GP 17 External FAX Line Test
• GP 18 Printing Reports
• GP 19 Intermittent or Noise Problem
• GP 20 The module is heavy
• GP 21 Device Lubrication
• GP 22 Installation Space Requirements
Chain 127
127-310 to 127-315, 342 ESS Error RAP ....................................................................... 2-477
127-337 Job Template HDD Write Error RAP................................................................. 2-477
127-353 to 127-399 Fatal Error RAP .............................................................................. 2-478
Chain 133
133-210 to 133-217 Fax Parameter Incorrect RAP......................................................... 2-479
133-218 Fax Card Message Memory RAP ..................................................................... 2-479
133-219 to 133-223 Fax Card Error 1 RAP..................................................................... 2-480
133-224 Controller ROM Fax Card ROM Mismatch RAP ............................................... 2-480
133-226 Illegal Country Code RAP ................................................................................. 2-481
133-280 to 133-283 Fax Card Error 2 RAP..................................................................... 2-481
133-701 Replacement Character Detected RAP ............................................................ 2-482
133-710 Tray Select Fail RAP......................................................................................... 2-482
Chain 500
500-030 DC612 IOT Wait State RAP .............................................................................. 2-483
500-033, 500-035 Diagnostic Documents RAP .............................................................. 2-483
500-990 DC612 Print Error RAP ..................................................................................... 2-484
Other Faults
OF 1 Unusual Noises RAP.............................................................................................. 2-485
OF 2 Control Panel Touch Screen Failure RAP.............................................................. 2-487
OF 3 Exit Tray Full RAP ................................................................................................. 2-487
OF 4 550 Option No Paper Sensor RAP......................................................................... 2-488
OF 5 Multi-feed Error RAP .............................................................................................. 2-489
OF 6 Power On Self Test (POST)................................................................................... 2-489
OF 7 Registration Sensor RAP ....................................................................................... 2-490
OF 8 Tray 1 Feed Clutch RAP ........................................................................................ 2-491
OF 9 Registration Clutch RAP ........................................................................................ 2-491
OF 10 550 Option Main Feed Assembly Path Sensor RAP ............................................ 2-492
OF 11 550 Option Feed Clutch Assembly RAP .............................................................. 2-493
OF 12 550 Option Registration Clutch Assembly RAP ................................................... 2-494
OF 13 550 Option Drive Assembly RAP ......................................................................... 2-495
OF 14 MSI Tray Feed Solenoid RAP .............................................................................. 2-496
OF 15 Exit Sensor RAP .................................................................................................. 2-496
OF 16 Exit Drive Assembly Clutch 1 RAP....................................................................... 2-497
OF 17 Exit Drive Assembly Clutch 2 RAP....................................................................... 2-497
OF 18 +24VDC Power RAP ............................................................................................ 2-498
OF 19 +5VDC Power RAP .............................................................................................. 2-498
OF 20 +3.3VDC Power RAP ........................................................................................... 2-499
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the UI assembly, PL 1.1A Item 4 C400 or PL 1.1B Item 4
C405 and the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. Ensure that all surface
mounted modules on the ESS PWBA are securely connected.
3. Refer to WD 9 C405 or WD 10 C400 and PJ Locations. Check the wiring between the
ESS PWBA and the UI assembly.
4. Reload the software, GP 9.
5. If the fault persists install new components as necessary:
• UI assembly, PL 1.1A Item 4 C400 or PL 1.1B Item 4 C405.
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the LONGDIAG mode routine.
3. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL
18.2 Item 4 are securely connected, refer to WD 9 and WD 10. Ensure all surface
mounted modules on both PWBAs are securely connected.
4. Reload the software, GP 9.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
003-321 IISS sending error detected by the controller. After commands were sent twice from
003-339 Transmission establishing error for sending.
the controller, the controller could not receive acknowledgment from the IISS.
003-340 Synchronous send error.
003-322 IISS sending error detected by the controller. After commands were sent twice from
the controller, the controller could not receive acknowledgment from the IISS.
003-341 Transmission error for sending.
003-323 IISS sending error detected by the controller. After commands were sent twice from
003-342 Incorrect argument error for receiving.
the controller, the controller could not receive acknowledgment from the IISS.
003-343 Synchronous receive error.
003-324 IISS sending error detected by the controller. After commands were sent twice from
the controller, the controller could not receive acknowledgment from the IISS.
Procedure
003-325 IISS sending error detected by the controller. After commands were sent twice from
the controller, the controller could not receive acknowledgment from the IISS.
WARNING
003-326 IISS sending error detected by the controller. After commands were sent twice from Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
the controller, the controller could not receive acknowledgment from the IISS. not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
003-327 IISS sending error detected by the controller. After commands were sent twice from Perform the steps that follow:
the controller, the controller could not receive acknowledgment from the IISS. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the LONGDIAG mode routine.
003-328 IISS sending error detected by the controller. After commands were sent twice from
the controller, the controller could not receive acknowledgment from the IISS. 3. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL
18.2 Item 4 are securely connected, refer to WD 9 and WD 10. Ensure all surface
003-329 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence mounted modules on both PWBAs are securely connected.
of a transmission failure is received. 4. Reload the software, GP 9.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
003-330 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-331 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-332 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-333 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-334 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-335 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-336 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
Procedure 003-346 When IIT image delivered was received from the IISS, an error of the X hot line was
detected.
WARNING Procedure
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. WARNING
Perform the steps that follow: Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
2. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the LONGDIAG mode routine.
Perform the steps that follow:
3. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
18.2 Item 4 are securely connected, refer to WD 9 and WD 10. Ensure all surface
mounted modules on both PWBAs are securely connected. 2. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the LONGDIAG mode routine.
4. Reload the software, GP 9. 3. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected, refer to WD 9 and WD 10. Enure all surface mounted
modules on both PWBAs are securely connected.
4. Reload the software, GP 9.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure 003-704 Color correction color difference error during 2 sided simultaneous scan.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to change the magnification settings so that the same magnification
Procedure
applies to side 1 and 2. Perform the steps that follow:
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9. 1. Advise the customer to load the 2 sided simultaneous scan correction chart correctly.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to cancel the job, then retry the job. 1. Advise the customer to change the parameters, then retry the job.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
003-930 300dpi is not available for scanning an A3 document. 003-755 Command error returned from the ESS PWBA.
003-933 300dpi is not available for scanning the next A3 document. 003-756 All scanned documents were detected as blank.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to perform scanning below 300 dpi resolution or perform scanning in 1. Advise the customer to cancel the job, then retry the job.
other than mixed mode. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
003-931 400dpi is not available for scanning an A3 document. 003-761 Tray selection error.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to cancel the job, as only 1 page can be stored. 1. Advise the customer to cancel the job then to change the scan resolution parameter and
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9. then retry the job.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to cancel the job then to change the job properties, then retry the 1. Advise the customer to cancel the job then to clear the B/W setting for color mode or the
job. side 2 cover image setting, then retry the job.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure 003-956 Undefined document size was detected when platen is selected and only APS
requires document size selection.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to change the job parameters, then retry the job.
Procedure
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to input an appropriate value for the document size, then retry the
job.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Ask the customer to load a correct size document, then retry the job. 1. Advise the customer to reload the correct size paper, then retry the job.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
005-275 RAM failure on the DADF PWBA was detected at power on. Procedure
Initial Actions
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. WARNING
• Reload the software, GP 9. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Reload the software, GP 9.
WARNING 2. Install a new DADF assembly, PL 50.1 Item 1.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to WD 17 and PJ Locations. Check the wiring between the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4
and the DADF assembly, PL 50.1 Item 1, (P/J1371 and P/J1377). The connections are
good.
Y N
securely attach the connections.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Clean the DADF document sensor and the area surrounding the DADF feed roll kit. The fault
persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Clean or install a new DADF feed roll kit, PL 50.1 Item 99. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Procedure
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
Check the rear cover is undamaged and fully closed. The rear cover is undamaged.
Y N
Install a new rear cover assembly, PL 19.2A Item 10 C400 or PL 19.2B Item 15 C405.
Check the fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1 is correctly installed. Switch off, then switch on the
machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions
Enter dC330 code 071-104 exit sensor, PL 17.1 Item 11. The sensor operation fails.
Y N
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Refer to WD 15 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the exit sensor, PL 17.1 Item
11 and MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 (P/J155, P/J151, and P/J15). The connections are
good.
Y N
Attach the connectors securely.
Refer to WD 15 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the wires in the harness connecting
the exit sensor, PL 17.1 Item 11 and the relay connector (P/J155 and P/J151). The continuity
is good.
Y N
Install a new exit sensor harness assembly, PL 17.1 Item 18.
Refer to WD 15 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the wires in the harness connecting
the relay connector and the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 (P/J151 and P/J15). The continu-
ity is good.
10-328 Warming up - timeout Check the fuser and drawer connector for proper installation without bent pins, or foreign
objects. The installation is good.
010-329 First time use fuse did not blow
Y N
Correct installation problems, then perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
010-331 Fuser over temperature detected
Refer to WD 5 and PJ Locations. Check the wiring between the fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1,
010-332 NC senor disconnection detected P/J281 and the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 (P/J28). The connections are good.
Y N
010-333 NC sensor detected over temperature
Attach the connections securely.
010-334 NC sensor detected abnormal temperature
Refer to WD 5 and PJ Locations. Check the wiring between the fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1,
P/J281 and the LVPS PWBA, PL 18.1 Item 14 (P/J47). The connections are good.
010-335 NC sensor compensation output AD value is out of specification Y N
Attach the connections securely.
010-338 Main or sub lamp is switched on over the NVM setting time
Refer to WD 5 and PJ Locations. Check the wiring between the LVPS PWBA, PL 18.1 Item 14
010-339 NC sensor detected a temperature under specification
(P/J508) and the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 (P/J29). The connections are good.
Y N
010-340 Thermistor disconnection detected Attach the connections securely.
NOTE:
• These errors are often intermittent. Check Fault History for any of the listed fault codes
showing multiple occurrences. Install a new fuser even if a power cycle clears the error.
• A fuser used only for troubleshooting purposes will blow the first-time-use fuse at power-
on. Though the fuser is still new, it can no longer reset an end-of-life message when
installed a second time.
Procedure
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
Install a new fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1.
016-798 A HDD unavailable error was returned when the decomposer called the S-image
library.
Initial Actions
The HDD maybe full, Advise the customer to delete unnecessary documents.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Check the wiring between the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 and the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2
Item 24.
3. Ensure the EMMC card is fully seated, PL 18.2 Item 37.
4. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the JOB LOG CLEAR MODE routine.
5. Install a new ESS PWBA PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
WARNING
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure the fax PWBA is correctly installed, PL 18.2 Item 7.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Advise the customer that the postscript kit is required. 2. Set the printer kit SW key to ’Enabled’.
016-224 The S2X PWB has failed to access to the internal PCI space.
016-225 The S2X PWB failed the ROM check sum test.
016-226 The S2X PWB failed to detect the video clocks sent from the IIT.
016-227 The S2X PWB failed the write/read test of the internal DDR memory.
016-228 The S2X PWB failed the desired value comparison of the high-compression process
results using the internal test patterns.
016-240 The high compression PDF board (S2X) failed the NVM checksum
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
3. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Reload the software, GP 9. 2. Reload the software, GP 9.
3. If the fault persists contact Xerox Technical Support. 3. Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
016-235 Another internal error causes the XCP function to stop. Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
WARNING not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Perform the steps that follow:
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Perform the steps that follow:
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
3. Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
2. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Switch off the machine, GP 4.
3. Disconnect an un-required or incorrect type of accessory.
4. If necessary install an accessory of the correct type.
5. Switch on the machine, GP 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA and DADF PWB are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. If the fault persists, install a new components as necessary:
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
• DADF assembly, PL 50.1 Item 1.
WARNING
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA are securely connected. Ensure all surface
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA are securely connected. Ensure all surface
mounted modules are securely connected.
mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the LONGDIAG mode routine.
3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Advise the customer to perform a manual retrieval of machine data from their accounting
server.
3. Check the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics. Advise the customer to push
the user accounts to the machine from their accounting server.
4. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA are securely connected. Ensure all surface
mounted modules are securely connected.
5. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the LONGDIAG mode routine.
6. Reload the software, GP 9.
7. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
For information only, no service action necessary. Wait for the Scheduled Image Overwrite to
complete.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the LONGDIAG mode routine.
4. Reload the software, GP 9.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Refer to WD 9 C405 or WD 10 C400 and PJ Location. Check the wiring between the ESS
PWBA and the UI console.
2. Refer to WD 9 C405 or WD 10 C400 and PJ Location. Ensure the connectors PJ 1 and PJ
1362 are securely connected.
3. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
4. Install new components as necessary:
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
• UI assembly, PL 1.1A Item 4 C400, PL 1.1B Item 4 C405.
016-328 The controller has detected a failure at its cable connection with the MCU. 016-331 The total memory size installed in slot 2 is outside the specification value.
Procedure 016-332 The total memory size installed in slot 1 and 2 is outside the specification value.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow: not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA are securely connected. Ensure all surface Perform the steps that follow:
mounted modules are securely connected. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
3. Refer to WD 9 C405 or WD 10 C400 and PJ Location. Check the wiring between the ESS 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected.
PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 and the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
4. Refer to WD 9 C405 or WD 10 C400 and PJ Location. Ensure the connectors PJ 10 and 3. Reload the software, GP 9.
PJ 920 are securely connected. 4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. If the fault is 16-342, 16-343 or 16-345, ensure the date and time on the device is set cor-
rectly.
3. If the fault is 16-349, 16-350 or 16-351, remove the EMMC card, then install the EMMC
card, PL 18.2 Item 37.
4. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA are securely connected. Ensure all surface
mounted modules are securely connected.
5. Reload the software, GP 9.
6. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
016-354 Communication cannot be established between the IIT and the ESS PWBA. 016-356 Cont video ASIC diagnostic fail.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors and surface mounted modules on the ESS PWBA are securely 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA and DADF PWB are securely connected.
connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9. 3. Refer to WD 9 C405 or WD 10 C400 and PJ Location. Check the wiring between the ESS
4. Refer to WD 9 C405 or WD 10 C400 and PJ Location. Check the wiring between the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 and the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 and the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. 4. Refer to WD 9 C405 or WD 10 C400 and PJ Location. Ensure the connectors PJ 10 and
5. Refer to WD 9 C405 or WD 10 C400 and PJ Location. Ensure the connectors PJ 10 and PJ 920 are securely connected.
PJ 920 are securely connected. 5. Reload the software, GP 9.
6. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. 6. If the fault persists, install a new components as necessary:
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
• DADF assembly, PL 50.1 Item 1.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. 2. Reload the software, GP 9.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected. 3. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.2 Item 4.
016-361 Cont USB 3.0 device diagnostic fail. 016-362 Cont UI diagnostic fail 2.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. 2. Refer to WD 9 C405 or WD 10 C400 and PJ Location. Check the wiring between the ESS
PWBA and the UI console.
3. Refer to WD 9 C405 or WD 10 C400 and PJ Location. Ensure the connectors PJ 1 and PJ
1362 are securely connected.
4. Install new components as necessary:
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
• UI assembly, PL 1.1A Item 4, C400 or PL 1.1B Item 4, C405.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow: not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Perform the steps that follow:
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA are securely connected. Ensure all surface
mounted modules are securely connected. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
3. Reload the software, GP 9. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA are securely connected. Ensure all surface
mounted modules are securely connected.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
016-367 Cont HDD diagnostic fail 2. 016-369 Cont S2X PWB diagnostic fail.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow: not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
2. Remove, then install the hard disk drive, PL 18.2 Item 91. Perform the steps that follow:
WARNING
WARNING Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow: 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA are securely connected. Ensure all surface
2. Ensure that all connectors on the fax PWB, PL 18.2 Item 7 are securely connected. mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9. 3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. 4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Enter the correct user name or password for 802.1x authentication from the machine
panel.
2. Check the switch settings and network connections of the authentication device switch
that is physically connected to the machine via the network and connect it correctly.
3. Check the settings in the authentication device switch that is physically connected to the
machine via the network.
016-430 The route certificate of the server certificate (for network 2) of the authentication 016-431 An internal error has occurred in the 802.1x supplicant function of the machine. An
server is not stored in the machine or it does not match. incorrect protocol signal was received from the authentication server in network 2.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
1. Store the root server certificate for the authentication server in the machine.
2. If the root certificate of the server certificate cannot be obtained, disable the 802.1x set-
ting item (for fault 016-403 network 1), (for fault 016-430 network 2) in the device.
016-408 The package management function has detected the damaged JAR file. Procedure
Ensure all paper trays are fully inserted.
016-409 The package management function has detected a version mismatch.
016-410 The package management function has detected the invalid definition file.
016-411 The package management function has detected an unsupported class file version.
016-412 The package management function has detected the plug-in has caused an error that
is included in a miscellaneous group of errors.
Procedure
Advise the customer to modify the plug-in, then re-install.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check then clear any other faults, dC125. 1. Cancel the power save mode.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
016-501 An error has occurred during the process of writing data to the S2X-ROM. Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
WARNING not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Perform the steps that follow:
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA are securely connected. Ensure all surface
Perform the steps that follow: mounted modules are securely connected.
1. Reload the software, GP 9. 2. Reload the software, GP 9.
2. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. 3. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
016-510 Image log no send rule 2. Rules for log image transfer are not registered, causing 016-512 Image Log invalid Send rule 2. Rules for log image transfer are illegal.
transfer failure.
Procedure
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to register rules for transfer from the destination image log control WARNING
server to the device. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to overwrite rules for transfer from the destination image log control
server to the device.
2. If installed check the wiring between the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 and the optional
hard disk.
3. Install a new hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 91.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the print mode. If print mode is set to High Resolution, 1. Advise the customer to check whether the application that sends a print job and the print
change it to Standard. If print mode is set to Standard, change it to High Speed. instructions has a problem.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 and hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 and hard disk, PL 18.2 Item
91 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected. 91 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9. 3. Reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to resubmit the job with corrected parameters. Rewrite the Post- 1. PS booklet and watermark/UUID cannot be specified at the same time. Advise the cus-
Script file so that the page device and process color model cannot be changed in the pro- tomer to cancel either one.
cess. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 and hard disk, PL 18.2 Item
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 and hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 91 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
91 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected. 3. Reload the software, GP 9.
3. Reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Ask the System Administrator to increase the limit of printable sides.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to repeat the operation or change the output file format/color mode.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 and hard disk, PL 18.2 Item
91 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. Perform dC355 Hard Disk Prediction Test.
5. Install a new hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 91.
6. Install a new ESS PWBA PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to install the SSL client certificate into the device as the LDAP server will
request it.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to insert the smart card into the reader then recheck the PIN before
performing the personal signature scan.
2. Check the wiring between the card reader and the machine.
Procedure 016-525 LDAP-SSL authentication error 115 has occurred (the server certificate has expired).
The device cannot trust the SSL certificate of the LDAP server. Advise the customer to register
the root certificate of the LDAP server SSL certificate in the device. Procedure
Advise the customer to change the LADP server SSL certificate to one that is valid.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to Ensure that the address of the LDAP server set in the device matches Obtain a device log, refer to GP 15 Obtaining Audit and Device Logs. Escalate the problem to
the address of the LDAP server defined in the SSL certificate. 2nd Level support.
Procedure Procedure
If the fault persists, obtain a device log, refer to GP 15 Obtaining Audit and Device Logs. Esca- Check the network connection. Advise the customer to check that the remote download server
late the problem to 2nd Level support. is correctly configured and operating on the network.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check the network connection setting (port) of the remote download
server.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Advise the customer to delete unnecessary files.
3. Check the wiring between the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 and the hard disk, PL 18.2 Item
91.
4. Perform dC355 Hard Disk Prediction Test.
5. Install a new hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 91.
6. Install a new ESS PWBA PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to:. The version of the ApeosWare Authentication Agent needs to be upgraded. Advise the cus-
1. Register the device in the ApeosWare Authentication Agent. tomer to check that the machine is a product that is supported by the upgraded version of the
ApeosWare Authentication Agent.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to correctly set the domain user reference login name or the reference Advise the customer to check that the ApeosWare Authentication Agent can connect to the
password of the ApeosWare Authentication Agent domain. database or the active directory.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check that all system data that must be set to perform the remote Advise the customer to:
download are correct. 1. Check that the network cable is connected and check the settings of the authentication
agent function.
2. If DNS address of the server is set as the server name/IP address of the ApeosWare
Authentication Agent in the printer function settings list, check that DNS is enabled.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to make corrections so that the temporary user entries of the Active Direc- Advise the customer to:
tory or Authentication Agent do not have the same IC card information. 1. Delete any unnecessary files.
2. Set the image quality to normal.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Perform the steps that follow:
1. During backup, save the FW download file into the ’dwld’ directory in the USB memory, 1. Before performing the HDD backup, delete existing backup files to increase the capacity.
connect it the machine, then perform the backup. 2. Before performing USB backup, delete the backup files in the USB memory, or use a PC
2. During restore, use the same IOT and IIT ROM versions as those during backup. When to delete unnecessary files on the USB memory to increase the capacity.
performing restore using a USB backup file, also use the same HDD configuration.
3. If there is no HDD, use the same ESS ROM versions as well. If the same configuration
cannot be attained, delete the backup file from the panel.
4. If the problem occurred at an attempt to restore a backed-up file from an external place,
check that the ESS/IIT/IOT/FAX ROM version is still the same as the version used when
the backed-up file was created. Furthermore, check the device is the same as the one
that generated the backed-up file.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Increase memory size for job ticket on UI Panel. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
1. Check the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics. Run the job.
2. Before performing the restore using the HDD backup file, delete backup files.
3. For USB backup, check that the USB memory is correctly installed. If the fault persists,
use a PC to format the USB Memory.
4. When performing restore using USB backup files, check that the USB memory is correctly
installed. If the fault persists, delete the backup files.
5. If the problem still persists, use a PC to format the USB memory.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check for a mismatch between parameters specified by the job ticket. Advise the customer to check that the device that receives data can print it onto paper whose
Correct the parameters, then resend the job. properties (size/type/weight/color/punched) are specified by job ticket.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to ensure the that software is correctly installed on client that generates Advise the customer to check the connection to the DNS and whether the destination server
job ticket; operational requirements are met; and software version matches device version. name has been registered in the DNS.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to set the DNS address or set the destination server address using IP Advise the customer to check that the network communication between the transfer destination
address. FTP server and the machine is available. For example:
• Check that the server IP address is correct.
• Check the connection of network cables.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to check that the login name (user name) and password are correct.
1. Check that the FTP service of the server is operating.
2. Check that the FTP port number of the server matches the FTP port number that is set on
the device.
016-584 When creating a folder in the server after connecting to the FTP server, the folder cre- 016-587 When deleting a folder in the server after connecting to the FTP server, the deletion
ation has failed. has failed.
Procedure 016-589 Failed to read data from the FTP server after connecting to the FTP server during
scanner (save to PC) FTP transfer.
Advise the customer to:
1. If a lock directory (*.LCK) remains in the transfer destination, delete it then retry the job.
Procedure
2. Check that the specified name is a folder name that can be created in the storage desti-
nation. Advise the customer to check whether there is access right to the FTP server and grant the
proper rights.
3. Check whether a folder with the same name as the specified name already exists.
4. Check that the storage destination has enough free space.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to set ‘File Name Conflict’ to other than ‘Cancel Job’.
1. Check the access right to the server.
2. If a lock directory (*.LCK) remains in the transfer destination, delete it then retry the job.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer that if ‘Add’ is selected for ‘File Name Conflict’, check that the file format is Advise the customer that if ‘Add’ is selected for ‘File Name Conflict’, check that the NEXT-
not set to Multi-page. NAME.DAT file is correct.
Procedure
Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
NOTE: Default is 10 authentication errors. dC131 NVM Read/Write [700-564] can be set
between 1 to 600 authentication errors.
016-608 Controller-MCU cable connection fault 016-610 PCI EX option no support device fail.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
WARNING
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL
18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBAs
are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. If the fault persists, install a new components as necessary:
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
• MCU PWB, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure the EMMC card, PL 18.2 Item 37 is correctly installed.
3. Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to delete unnecessary documents, then repeat the operation. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check that the required optional software is installed and enabled.
Also check that the correct print driver is being used.
2. If the fault persists, perform the steps that follow:
a. Reload the software, GP 9.
b. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 18.2 Item 4 and the hard disk, PL 18.2
Item 91.
c. Check the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics.
d. Install new components as necessary:
• Hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 91.
• ESS PWB, PL 18.2 Item 4.
WARNING
WARNING Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow: 1. Advise the customer to:
1. Advise the customer to delete unnecessary documents or users, then repeat the opera- a. Remove the conditions that disable sample print.
tion.
b. If the fault occurred at installation, check whether the operations for Sample Print are
2. Check the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics. correct.
3. Install a new hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 91. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Check the wiring between the ESS PWBA and the hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 91.
4. Check the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics.
5. Install a new hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 91.
6. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
WARNING
WARNING Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow: 1. Advise the customer to:
1. Advise the customer to: a. Switch off parallel bi-directional communication in the printer driver.
a. Cancel annotation or watermark, then repeat the operation. b. Set a longer time for Auto Output Time.
b. Reduce the number of document pages. In Mixed Size mode, only a single size is c. Change the PC BIOS settings.
available.
d. Use a shorter, genuine, parallel cable.
c. For printing Stored Document, delete unnecessary documents from the hard disk,
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected.
then repeat the operation.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
4. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 18.2 Item 4 and the hard disk, PL 18.2 Item
3. Check the wiring between the ESS PWBA and the hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 91. 91.
4. Check the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics. 5. Check the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics.
5. Install a new hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 91. 6. Install a new hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 91.
6. Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. 7. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to increase the resolution or enlarge the scan area. 1. Advise the customer to set a correct password and try again.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA are securely connected. Ensure all surface
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected. mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9. 3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. 4. Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to open the appropriate mailbox and then try again. 1. Advise the customer to input the correct password to use ESCP form.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA are securely connected. Ensure all surface 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA are securely connected. Ensure all surface
mounted modules are securely connected. mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9. 3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. 4. Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform the steps that follow: death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA are securely connected. Ensure all surface Perform the steps that follow:
mounted modules are securely connected. 1. Advise the customer to:
2. Reload the software, GP 9. a. Split any internet fax documents that would exceed 2GB in document storage size
3. Check the wiring between the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 and the hard disk, PL 18.2 Item into several jobs and control the usage amount of memory.
91. b. If there is a large amount of scan or internet fax documents being processed, wait
4. Check the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics. until the other jobs are completed before performing additional jobs.
5. Install a new hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 91. 2. Reload the software, GP 9.
6. Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. 3. Check the wiring between the ESS PWBA and the hard disk.
4. Check the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics.
5. Install a new hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 91.
6. Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to decrease the resolution to reduce the PLW memory. 1. Advise the customer to increase the PCL memory size. Increasing the memory for the
2. Reload the software, GP 9. whole system will increase the memory to be allocated to the decomposer in some mea-
sure.
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to directly scan the document and then send it to the fax recipient. 1. Advise the customer to install a Adobe Postscript 3 kit for PDF files or an emulation kit for
2. Reload the software, GP 9. PCL data.
2. If the fault persists for PDF files:
a. Install a optional hard disk kit, PL 18.2 Item 91.
b. Check the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: For information only, no service action necessary. Refer the customer to the User Guide.
1. Advise the customer to to switch off paper saving, then print the job again.
2. Ensure the print job is not a blank page.
Procedure 016-732 The decomposer detected that the form specified is not registered.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to refer to the User Guide to correct the valid range.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
1. Advise the customer to resend the data or form data.
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to obtain the download data again, then retry the job. Advise the customer to source a download file that has the same model with the device VerUP
then retry the job.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
1. Ensure that the cable connected to the device is secured correctly, then retry the job.
016-774 Disk full was detected when opening/writing file for compression type conversion. Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
016-775 Disk full was detected when opening/writing file for image processing operation.
1. Advise the customer to:
016-778 HDD full was detected when opening/writing file for operation. a. Use the printer driver of the machine to print.
b. Not use ContentsBridge to print a PDF file.
016-981 When accessing the HD, the HD is detected being full. c. Request the other party to resend the internet fax document using a print language
that can be printed by the machine.
Procedure 2. Reload the software, GP 9.
Perform the steps that follow: 3. Perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
1. Advise the customer to:
a. Split the job into pages in order to prevent the full state. Reduce the resolution if pos-
sible.
b. Delete documents that are no longer needed, such as; mailbox documents, fax send
wait documents, secure print documents and delayed print documents.
c. Retrieve each page from the EWS.
2. Check the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics.
3. Install a new hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 91.
4. Reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to request the Account Administrator for access to use the service. 1. Advise the customer to set the correct account, then redo.
2. Reload the software, GP 9. 2. Reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to: 1. Advise the customer to request the Account Administrator to set the number of copies,
a. Set the new function that is allowed for that account then try again. etc.
b. Request the Account Administrator to add the rights. 2. Reload the software, GP 9.
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to resend the job. 1. Advise the customer to print in the high speed mode. If the fault persists, use print guar-
2. Reload the software, GP 9. anteed mode.
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure 016-766 The memory capacity allocated by the SMTP server is exceeded.
Advise the customer to:
1. Print a configuration report and confirm that the DNS settings are correct.
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
2. Confirm that the SMTP server settings are correct.
1. Delete jobs on their server because the machine is receiving communication from their
3. Enter the IP Address of their SMTP server into the machine.
SMTP (email) server that the server disk drive or mailboxes are full.
4. If the fault persists, refer the customer to the System Administrator Guide to check that
2. Refer to the product's System Administrator Guide to ensure that the machine is correctly
the machine is correctly configured.
configured if the fault persists.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to check that the sender address is correct.
1. Advise the customer to check a specific mail addressor set a correct address.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to contact the network administrator for advice and ensure that the SMTP Advise the customer to release the direct fax job prohibition (set the target system to 0).
server supports DSN or set Transmittal Confirmation to OFF, then send the job again.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to: 1. Advise the customer to:
a. Repeat the operation. a. Correctly set the subnet mask and gateway.
b. Reduce the scan resolution to 400 dpi or less then repeat the operation. b. From the destination server, ping the machine.
2. Reload the software, GP 9. c. Check whether characters other than ASCII are set for the host name of the device.
Set the host name of the device to ASCII characters.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
WARNING
2. Advise the customer to:
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
a. Reload the browser page then perform retrieval operation again.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. b. Re-activate the browser, then perform retrieval operation again.
Perform the steps that follow: c. Improve the connection status to a network.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. d. Check whether there are problems such as duplicated IP addresses.
2. Ensure all paper trays are loaded. 3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
3. If this occurs when sending email, Advise the customer to:
– Reduce the resolution then resend it.
– Reduce the size then resend it.
– Reduce the number of pages and separate the job into several batches when send-
ing.
– Set the output color to Black then resend it.
4. Check the wiring between the ESS PWBA and the hard disk.
5. Check the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics.
6. Reload the software, GP 9.
7. Install a new hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 91.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Reduce resolution (image to send quality), then resend the job. 1. Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
2. Reduce magnification, then resend the job. 2. Reload the software, GP 9.
3. Increase the maximum fragment quantity.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the me dis content from the PC. Check whether the print file 1. Advise the customer to check the me dis content from the PC. Check whether the print file
attribute data is displayed on the PC, then reset the settings. images are displayed on the PC, then reset the settings.
2. Reload the software, GP 9. 2. Reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure 016-911 The paper and staples requested by the print specification are not loaded or different
sizes and/or types of paper switching are requested from the same tray.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
Procedure
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
Perform the steps that follow:
3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
1. Advise the customer to correctly load paper or install the staples.
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
016-946 A document or separator has been inserted between Cover pages or Separator
pages.
016-947 The system detected that no tray is loaded with paper for Auto Paper Selection after
the job for which the paper for APS (Auto Paper Selection) was selected or APS was set has
started.
016-948 The covers with images, separators, or blank pages were detected after the job had
started with Booklet specified.
016-949 The document with a different size/orientation from the operated page was tried to be
inserted for the job with Attachment specified.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to specify the job to avoid the detection conditions.
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
NOTE: If it is possible to log in to the Embedded Web Server by entering the IP address of the
device, then the network controller on the ESS PWBA is good.
Check that the date and time are set correctly on the device, refer to GP 34 How to Set the
Date and Time. The time and date are correct.
Y N
Set the time and date parameters correctly.
Check the LED link lights at the ESS PWBA ethernet connection. The LEDs illuminate.
Y N
If possible, perform the following to try and eliminate the problem of a faulty network port:
• Check the connections at the network port and ESS PWBA are good.
• Connect the device to another network port.
• Advise the customer to provide a new network port to ESS PWBA cable.
• Check the operation of a known good device to the network port.
If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. The LEDs illuminate.
Y N
Contact 2nd level support.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to change the user privileges.
1. Check the job parameter settings, then re-run the job.
2. Check the response packet from the job limit server.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to contact the System Administrator. Advise the customer to change the system data that disables the printing without load to Not
disable (0).
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to change the SSL operation mode setting to other than STARTTLS Perform the steps that follow:
mode. 1. Advise the customer to check if this occurred in TLS Mode, it may be due to an incorrect
port number. Check the port number settings of the SMTP server.
2. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the LONGDIAG mode routine.
NOTE: This problem can also be fixed by switching off the machines SSL Server Verifica-
tion setting. This will render the machine unable to guarantee the authenticity of the
SMTP server that it is connecting to.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check that the device supports Denshi-Pen, if it does, perform the 1. Advise the customer to check the driver settings.
job again. 2. Reload the software, GP 9.
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to:
1. Advise the customer to: 1. Set the spooling of the print data at the destination device to hard disk.
a. Change output format to other than MS Word, MS Excel. 2. Change spooling setting to Spool to Hard Disk.
b. Start Job Flow Service after satisfying all conditions below:
• The document for processing is a scan document.
• The document for processing is full color.
• Size of the document for processing is between 50x50mm and 297x432mm.
• Color space of the document for processing is standard color space.
• Resolution of the document for processing is 300dpi.
• Magnification of the of the document for processing is 100%.
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to check that network communication between the POP server and the
1. Check the connection of the network cable. machine is available:
2. Check the destination device is powered on. 1. Check that the POP server IP address that is set in the device is correct.
3. Check that the IPP port of the destination device is enabled. 2. Check the connection of network cables.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to disable the offline status of the destination device. Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
017-767 An SSL server authentication error has occurred as there is something wrong in the
017-763 The validity period of the server certificate has expired.
server certificate data.
017-764 The server name does not match the server address of the server certificate.
Procedure
The machine is unable to trust the SSL certificate of the POP server. Advise the customer to 017-768 The validity period of the Server Certificate has not started yet.
register the root certificate of the POP server SSL certificate in the machine.
017-769 The validity period of the server certificate has expired.
017-770 The server name does not match the server address of the server certificate.
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Check that the clock of the POP server and the machine are correct. If the clock is cor-
rect, change the POP server SSL certificate to one that is valid.
2. Check the validity period settings of the POP server certificate.
3. Check that the server name that are registered in the POP server certificate and the
server address are correct.
NOTE: This problem can also be fixed by switching off the machines SSL Server Verifica-
tion setting. This will render the machine unable to guarantee the authenticity of the POP
server that it is connecting to.
017-771 A software internal error has occurred when POP over SSL process is in progress. Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
Procedure 1. Advise the customer to:
Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
a. Darken the density during scan.
b. Switch off the blank suppression instruction.
2. Enter dC131 Adjust the NVM values that follow as necessary:
• 840-223: Blank page detection I-formatter control parameter: lower the file size
based blank paper detection level.
• 840-224: Blank page detection I-formatter control parameter: lower the black dot
count based blank paper detection level.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check the setting related to the Netlog function, then if necessary con- For information only, no service action necessary.
tact their IT help desk or system administrator.
Procedure
Advise the customer to check:
1. The status of the Syslog server.
2. The address value of the Syslog that is set to the device.
3. Whether there is an issue in the network route between the device and the Syslog server,
or a network cable failure.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to reinstall after correcting the custom image processing plug-in.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Procedure
Advise the customer to set the permissions as required.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to clear the IPSEC setting mismatch and re-enable the IPSEC. Advise the customer:
1. That there is a check mark at Account Invalid for the relevant user in the active directory
NOTE: Mismatched IPSEC settings occur when the password is not set because the authenti- of the LDAP authentication destination server. The server has been set to prohibit access
cation method is set to pre-shared key or when IPSEC certificate is not set because the from the relevant user.
authentication method is set to digital signature. 2. To consult with the Server Administrator.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to change the setting to a different IP address. Either that or allow the
1. Advise the customer to change the setting to a different IP address. same IP address setting.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure 018-412 The same IP address device as the state-less auto setting address 2 of this machine
exists on the network in the network environment where Ethernet 2 is connected.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to: 018-413 The same IP address device as the IPv6 state-less auto setting address 3 of this
a. Change the IPv4 address of this machine or the IPv4 address of the network upper machine exists on the network in the network environment where the Ethernet 2 is connected.
apparatus.
b. For manual address setting, ensure that the IP address specified by the client is not Procedure
used in other places.
Perform the steps that follow:
c. Check the respective server setting environments with the client.
1. Advise the customer to:
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
a. Change the IPv6 address of the network upper apparatus that is duplicated to
resolve the IP address duplication.
b. Check if the IP address that was set in state-less address auto setting is not used in
other places.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to change the IPv6 manual setting address of this machine or the 1. Advise the customer to:
IPv6 address of the network upper apparatus. a. Change the IPv6 address of the network upper apparatus that is duplicated to
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP. resolve the IP address duplication.
b. Check if the IPv6 address that was automatically set as link local address is not used
in other places.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure 018-430 There is an IP address conflict with another system on the network (WIFI direct).
Perform the steps that follow:
018-431 There is an IP address conflict with another system on the network (WIFI).
1. Switch off the machine, GP 4. Remove, then install the WIFI module. Switch on the
machine, GP 4. 018-432 There is an IP address conflict with another system on the network (WIFI).
2. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• Wireless adaptor, PL 18.2 Item 90. 018-433 There is an IP address conflict with another system on the network (WIFI).
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
018-434 There is an IP address conflict with another system on the network (WIFI).
018-435 There is an IP address conflict with another system on the network (WIFI).
018-436 There is an IP address conflict with another system on the network (WIFI).
Procedure
Advise the customer to request their network administrator to change the IP address of the
systems the machine is connected to, to something different.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to request their network administrator to change the setting for the Wi-Fi Advise the customer to request their network administrator to change the setting for the config-
network type to Infrastructure. uration information related to the IP protocol stack to Dual or the IPv4 mode.
Procedure 018-501 The device could not connect to the CA server when trying to do CA authentication.
The device has failed in communication.
Advise the customer to request their network administrator to change the setting for the Wi-Fi
band of this machine to Auto or the 2.4GHz mode.
018-503 The device received a message from the CA server and was waiting for a JRM/UI
judgment, but received no response in time.
018-504 During communication between the device and the CA server for authentication, a
mismatch in Session ID between both has occurred.
018-506 During communication between the device and the CA server, a mismatch in Field ID
between both has occurred.
018-507 The CA authentication server requested an entry of user info, and the server deter-
mined that the entered info was different.
018-508 In process of CA authentication, the device has received a server exception message
from the CA authentication server.
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Make the MCU PWBA and the ESS PWBA the same in agreement info.
2. Set up the server certificate, or set the CA function to off.
3. Check the address of the CA server, or recheck the connection to the network.
4. Retry the authentication operation.
5. Enter the correct user name and password.
6. Check the status of the CA server. Reboot it if necessary.
018-531 Other JRM detection errors during start-up of a CUI scan job.
018-532 Failed to create CUI scan job due to excessive overlapping of network transferred
Jobs (maximum is 3 simultaneous jobs), or there is insufficient internal source to create Jobs
(system limit).
Procedure
Advise the customer to wait for 1 minute, then perform the same operation again.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check the limit for the number of users that can connect to the shared folder. 1. Check that the drive and directory that are specified in the HTTP server that sends
2. Check whether the number of users who are concurrently using the server has exceeded scanned documents are accessible.
the maximum number. 2. Repeat the operation.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to ensure that the file name that is specified in the scanned document Advise the customer to:
destination does not contain any invalid characters. 1. Check that the directory that is specified in the scanned document destination HTTP
server exists.
2. Check that the file name that is specified in the scanned document destination HTTP
server exists.
Procedure 018-561 HTTP error, the host name is incorrect, or the script storage is incorrect.
Advise the customer that when performing scan Jobs to set File Name Conflict to other than
018-562 HTTP response client error.
Cancel Job.
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Check whether the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the
PC.
2. Check the login user name.
3. Check the login password.
4. Check the name of scanned document destination HTTP server.
5. Check the server path name of scanned document destination HTTP server.
6. Check the server settings.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check whether the scanned document destination HTTP server has been registered in 1. Check whether the proxy server name that is set in the device has been registered in the
the DNS. DNS.
2. Check whether it is connected to the DNS server. 2. Check whether it is connected to the DNS server.
3. Check whether the DNS server address is set. 3. Check whether the DNS server address is set.
018-567 HTTP server access error during connection, reading, writing or file closing. Procedure
Advise the customer to:
Procedure 1. Check whether the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the
Advise the customer to: PC.
1. Check the network cable of the device. 2. Check whether the SSL setting of the scanned document destination HTTP server is
2. Check whether the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the valid.
PC. 3. Check the name of scanned document destination HTTP server.
4. Check the server path name of scanned document destination HTTP server.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check whether the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the 1. Check whether the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the
PC. PC.
2. Check whether the SSL server certificate of the scanned document destination HTTP 2. Check whether the SSL client certificate is set correctly in the device.
server is registered in the device. 3. Check whether a valid device certificate is registered in the scanned document destina-
3. Check whether the SSL server certificate of the scanned document destination HTTP tion HTTP server.
server is valid. For example, check the items that follow:
• The certificate has not expired yet.
• The time that is set in the device is correct.
• It is not in the discard list.
• The certificate path of the SSL server certificate and import any necessary CA certif-
icate.
4. If the certificate is not registered in the scanned document destination HTTP server, dis-
able the device certificate validation.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to repeat the operation. Advise the customer to set the File Name Conflict to other than Cancel Job.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to perform the same operation again without multiple machines accessing Advise the customer to change the file name/destination folder on the scan server. Else, move
the same folder in the same server. or delete the files in the destination folder.
018-700 Network stack is not initialized fail. 018-702 LDAP protocol error 02, protocol error in response to the address book inquiry.
Procedure 018-703 LDAP protocol error 03, search time is timed out in response to the address book
Advise the customer to wait for a while, then perform the same operation again. inquiry.
018-704 LDAP protocol error 04, too many search results to be processed in response to the
address book inquiry.
018-705 LDAP protocol error 05, comparison request result is false in response to the address
book inquiry.
Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
valid network settings.
Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
Procedure 018-708 LDAP protocol error 08, strong authentication is required in response to the address
book inquiry.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. For a single occurrence, take no action.
Procedure
2. If the fault persists, Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
valid network settings.
Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
018-712 LDAP protocol error 12 at address book operation (extended function cannot be
Procedure used).
1. In case of IPv4 environment, Advise the customer to:
a. Check whether the address that is being used as the IPv4 address of the device is 018-713 LDAP protocol error 13 at address book operation (secrecy is required).
undefined, or whether it has become the Auto IP address.
b. Check if the network has been connected correctly. 018-714 LDAP protocol error 14 at Address Book operation (SASL bind in progress).
c. Check with the network administrator on whether the DHCP server address has
been exhausted. Procedure
2. In case of IPv6 environment, Advise the customer to: Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
a. Check whether the address that is being used as the IPv6 address of the device has settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
valid network settings.
been allocated with a global address that uses the network address distributed by
Y N
the IPv6 router.
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
b. Check if the network has been connected correctly. problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
c. Check with the network administrator on whether the IPv6 router has been config-
ured correctly. There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
Procedure 018-717 The server returned RFC2251 standard result message 17, at address book opera-
tion (the specified attribute is not defined)
Advice the customer that:
1. If the error occurred in the case of smart card authentication, algorithm is not supported 018-718 The server returned RFC2251 standard result message 18, at address book opera-
by the device is specified by KDC.
tion (unsuitable combination).
2. In the case of password authentication, KDC does not support any of the device’s algo-
rithms. 018-719 The server returned RFC2251 standard result message 19, at address book opera-
3. KDC settings should be reviewed. Also, in the case of devices supporting FIPS, disabling tion (limit violation).
FIPS mode may correct the problem.
4. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9. 018-720 The server returned RFC2251 standard result message 20, the specified attribute
already exists) in response to the address book inquiry.
018-721 The server returned RFC2251 standard result message 21 (syntax error of the speci-
fied attribute value) in response to the address book inquiry.
Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
valid network settings.
Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
Procedure 018-740 A connection certificate error has occurred during communication through XMPP pro-
tocol with Google server.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to confirm the network connection status, network settings status
with the system administrator.
Procedure
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to confirm with the network administrator the correct root CA certifi-
cate is present, certificate authentication settings are correct.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check if a higher CA certificate in the user SmartCard is registered with Advise the customer to check if the certificate in the user SmartCard is valid. If it has become
the device. If not, register it with the device. invalid or expired, renew it, or if the Kerberos server prohibits the use of the certificate, it is nec-
essary to ask the server administrator to authorise the server to permit it.
018-744 A network related (DNS name resolution) error has occurred when communicating
with Google server via HTTP.
018-745 A network related (proxy connection) error has occurred when communicating with
Google server via XMPP protocol.
018-746 A network related (DNS name resolution) error has occurred when communicating
with Google server via XMPP protocol.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the network connection status, settings status as the net-
work might be congested.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure 018-733 LDAP protocol error 33 at address book operation (wrong alias).
Perform the steps that follow:
018-734 LDAP protocol error 34 at address book operation (wrong DN format).
1. Advise the customer to check the HDD available capacity, and free up space. Print again
after executing all print jobs which are being spooled. 018-735 LDAP protocol error 35 at address book operation (object is terminated).
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
018-736 LDAP protocol error 36 at address book operation (cannot refer to alias).
Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
valid network settings.
Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to:
1. Advise the customer to check the settings. 1. Check the Communication Environment:
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9. Check that network communication between the transfer destination SMB server and this
machine is available, by the performing the steps that follow:
a. Network cable connection.
b. If the transfer destination address is specified using IP Address, check whether the
IP address is correct.
c. Check with the System Administrator on whether the SMB related ports are blocked
(whether there are blocked ports at the transfer destination server, between the MFD
and the server, etc.)
2. Check the SMB Server:
Check the network settings that follow to check if the computer operates as an SMB
server:
a. Whether the SMB related ports are blocked by software, such as anti-virus or a fire
wall, on the server.
3. Check the Resolution Server Name:
Check the network settings that follows to check if the computer operates as an SMB
server:
a. For communication that goes beyond the subnet and the server name is 15 charac-
ters or shorter, check the WINS server settings and check whether the server name
address can be resolved correctly.
4. If there is no problem, login to the SMB server from another PC using the same user
name and check whether a file can be written to the same storage destination on that
SMB server. If write is possible, try to perform the same operation again from the
machine.
018-750 LDAP protocol error 50 at address book operation (user does not have access privi- Procedure
leges)). Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
018-751 LDAP protocol error 51 at address book operation (busy). valid network settings.
Y N
018-752 LDAP protocol error 52 at address book operation (cannot be processed). Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service.
018-753 LDAP protocol error 53 at address book operation (execution denied).
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
018-754 LDAP protocol error 54 at address book operation (loop detected). Ask the customer to re-verify user name and password to be used for authentication to cancel
incorrect search login name. Check with the network administrator to verify authentication set-
Procedure ting of server side when the status is not improved.
Verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the remote
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates LDAP server.
valid network settings.
Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
NOTE: If the situation does not improve, it is highly likely that there is a problem occurring b. If it is taking a long time, consult with the System Administrator.
at the server. 2. If there is no problem, login to the SMB server from another PC using the same user
name and check whether a file can be written to the same storage destination on that
SMB server. If write is possible, try to perform the same operation again from the
machine.
NOTE: If the situation does not improve, there is a possibility of bad connection status in
the customers environment. Advise them to consult with the System Administrator.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check the settings of the distributed file system (DFS) with the system Advise the customer to:
administrator. 1. Check whether the usage condition at the storage destination PC has caused all the
memory to be used.
2. Terminate the applications that are currently not in use.
3. Check the memory usage status and perform upgrades to increase the memory.
4. Reboot the server.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check whether an anti-virus software is operating at the storage destination PC. If operat- 1. Check whether the server name, shared name, path name, etc. contains machine-depen-
ing, reduce the number of document copies to make the transmission file smaller. dent characters such as (special symbol), (number symbol), IV (roman numeral), etc.
2. Check that there is no cable unplugged or any issues with the router or the hub in the net- 2. If necessary, edit so that the name no longer contain any machine-dependent characters.
work route. Re-run the scanning job.
3. If the fault continues, refer to GP 15 Obtaining Audit and Device Logs, then escalate the
problem to 2nd Level support.
018-765 LDAP protocol error 65 at address book operation (object class specification error). Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
018-766 LDAP protocol error 66 at address book operation (entries other than termination can-
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
not be executed). valid network settings.
Y N
018-767 LDAP protocol error 67 at Address Book operation (cannot be executed at RDN).
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service.
018-768 LDAP protocol error 68 at address book operation (the specified entry already exists).
Ask the customer to retry search with narrower search target by changing search condition/
018-769 LDAP protocol error 69 at address book operation (object class cannot be changed). search start position in Address Book internal data. If the check is OK, there may be a problem
with the remote LDAP server.
018-771 LDAP protocol error 71 at address book operation (influence on multiple DSA).
Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
valid network settings.
Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
valid network settings.
Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
018-793 LDAP protocol error 93 at address book operation (result is not returned).
018-794 LDAP protocol error 94 at address book operation (result no longer exist).
018-795 LDAP protocol error 95 at address book operation (result still exists).
018-796 LDAP protocol error 96 at address book operation (client loop detected).
018-797 LDAP protocol error 97 at address book operation (maximum hop number for refer-
ence is exceeded).
Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
valid network settings.
Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
021-511 Installation status mismatch (EP system) 021-513 Already has EP-DX installed on the EP system.
Procedure
Advise the customer to check with the EP Center for the EP contract status, registration status
and system operation status.
Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
021-529 The latest version is detected (software update). 021-531 The software update server has detected a large load on itself.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Wait a while, then operate again.
2. If the fault persists, Advise the customer to check with the EP Center for the EP contract 2. If the fault persists, Advise the customer to check with the EP Center for the EP contract
status, registration status and system operation status. status, registration status and system operation status.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL
18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. Make sure all surface mounted modules on both
PWBAs are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform the steps that follow: death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Perform the steps that follow:
2. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. Make sure all surface mounted modules on both 2. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL
PWBAs are securely connected. 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBAs
3. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the NVRAM INIT MODE routine. are securely connected.
4. Reload the software, GP 9. 3. Reload the software, GP 9.
5. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary: 4. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. • MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. • ESS PWBA,PL 18.2 Item 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure the connectors on the hard disk are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Update to the most recent firmware, GP 9. 2. Ensure the connectors on the hard disk are securely connected.
3. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. 3. Format the hard disk drive, refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics.
4. Reload the software, GP 9.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform the steps that follow: death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Perform the steps that follow:
2. Ensure the connectors on the hard disk are securely connected. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
3. Format the hard disk drive, perform dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics. 2. Change the Print mode (Normal/High Quality/High Resolution). Inform the customer of
any print mode setting changes.
4. Reload the software, GP 9.
3. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBAs
are securely connected.
4. Format the hard disk drive, refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics.
5. Reload the software, GP 9.
6. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure
For information only, no service action necessary.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to use paper that is within specification. Refer to GP 26 Media Specifica- 1. Check the fault history for other active jam related fault codes, dC125.
tions. 2. Clear the paper jam, then rerun the print job.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Advise the customer to delete the document, reload and re-try the job.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to set the device to temporarily cancel forced printing. 1. Advise the customer to use paper that is within specification or to print simplex. Refer to
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9. GP 26 Media Specifications.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Reload the software, GP 9.
1. Advise the customer to use paper that is within specification or to print face up. Refer to
GP 26 Media Specifications.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure
Shown for information only. No service action necessary.
024-924 The magenta toner cartridge is empty. 024-940 The magenta CRU xerographic development assembly is at the end of life.
024-925 The cyan toner cartridge is empty. 024-941 The cyan CRU xerographic development assembly is at the end of life.
Procedure Procedure
Enter Diagnostics, GP 1. Select dC135 HFSI Counter. Compare the last installation of the rele- Enter Diagnostics, GP 1. Select dC135 HFSI Counter. Compare the last installation of the rele-
vant toner cartridge with the current page count to determine the number of prints/copies pro- vant CRU xerographic development assembly with the current page to determine the number
duced from the toner cartridge. The relevant toner cartridge is at end of life. of prints/copies produced from the CRU xerographic development assembly. The relevant
Y N CRU xerographic development assembly is at end of life.
Perform ADJ 6.1 Color Toner Density Sensors Cleaning. Make a color print or copy. The Y N
fault persists. Switch off the machine, GP 4. Remove the relevant CRU xerographic development
Y N assembly. Clean the contacts on the transfer CRUM connector assembly, PL 8.1 Item 1
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. and the corresponding contacts on the CRU xerographic development assembly. Install
the CRU xerographic development assembly. Switch on the machine, GP 4. Make a color
Install a new color toner density (CTD) sensor assembly, PL 6.1 Item 14. Make a color print or copy. The fault persists.
print or copy. The fault persists. Y N
Y N Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Reload the software, GP 9. Make a color print or copy. The fault persists.
Reload the software, GP 9. Make a color print or copy. The fault persists. Y N
Y N Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Install a new relevant CRU xerographic development assembly, PL 8.1.
Install a new relevant toner cartridge, PL 5.1.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Load the specified media. 1. Check the UI settings, ensure that the MSI tray is selected and the correct media used.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL 2. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL
18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBAs 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBAs
are securely connected. are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9. 3. Reload the software, GP 9.
Enter dC330, code 071-101, tray 1 no paper sensor. Manually activate the tray 1 no paper sen-
Procedure
sor. The display changes. Perform the OF 4 550 Option No Paper Sensor RAP.
Y N NOTE: The no paper sensor is integral to the 550 Option main feed assembly, PL 10.2 Item 1.
Check the tray 1 no paper sensor. Refer to GP 11 How to Check a Sensor. If necessary,
install a new tray 1 no paper sensor.
024-958 MSI paper size mismatch. 024-967 Different width mix paper detect..
Procedure
Shown for information only. No service action necessary.
024-966 The paper specified for printing cannot be detected (automatic tray size/automatic
paper size mode).
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Reload the relevant paper tray.
2. If the fault persists, perform the steps that follow:
a. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
b. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA,
PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on
both PWBAs are securely connected.
c. Reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure
Perform the 016-210, 506, 777, 780, 798 HDD Error RAP.
026-707 In the processing of a security-protected DocuWorks file, either of the password set Procedure
on the UI panel and the XPJL specified password (set in ContentsBridge utility) does not
Advise the customer:
match.
1. Reduce a resolution send parameter (image-to-send quality) then re-send the job.
Procedure 2. Reduce a magnification send parameter, then re-send the job.
Advise the customer: 3. Increase the maximum file accumulated data size.
1. Enter the correct password.
2. Enter Full Access Password, etc. from DocuWorks viewer then disable printing prohibited.
Print using printer driver (ART-EX, PCL, etc.).
Procedure Procedure
For information only, no service action necessary. Advise the customer to wait for approxi- Perform the steps that follow:
mately one day until an automatic deletion of documents makes space available. Then re-run 1. Advise the customer:
the job. a. Ask the sender of the S/MIME encrypted mail to encrypt the mail by the encryption
method (3DES), then re-send it.
b. Set FIPS140 Authentication Mode of the device to off.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer set up the device configuration info on the printer driver screen so that it Advise the customer shorten the specified storage location or the filename.
can match the actual configuration.
Procedure
Advise the customer:
1. Check whether the transfer destination WSD scan client and the machine are able to
communicate via the network. For example:
• Check whether the WSD scan client has enough free capacity.
• Check the connection of the network cable.
2. When using DADF, perform the scan using Windows Fax & Scan or change to the platen
to perform the scan.
Procedure
Advise the customer correct the PIN number, print count or password that is specified by PJL
Command, then try again.
Procedure
For one occurrence, take no action. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer change the IPv6 (Manual Setting Address) of this device to the IPv6 1. Advise the customer change the IPv6 Link Local Address of this device or the IPv6
address that can be used as the self-machine address. address of the other device on the network.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP. 2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer:
1. Advise the customer change the duplicated IP address of the PC. 1. Check with the System Administrator that the mail server has been launched and the
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP. environment is already used for other purposes (such as for PC).
2. Check that a correct SMTP server address is reflected in the device setting list:
a. When the SMTP server address is specified using IP address, set a correct IP
address.
b. When the SMTP server address is specified using FQDN, check that the FQDN
name is correct. Also check that a correct DNS server address is set for the device,
and set a correct IP address.
c. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check with the System Administrator that the mail server has been launched and the 1. Advise the customer specify the correct POP server authentication information.
environment is already used for other purposes (such as for PC). 2. Perform the 027-501 POP Server Fail for Mail IO RAP, then Advise the customer to spec-
2. Check that a correct POP server address is reflected in the device setting list: ify a correct POP User Name.
a. When the POP server address is specified using IP address, set a correct IP 3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
address.
b. When the POP server address is specified using FQDN, check that FQDN name is
correct. Also check that a correct DNS server address is set for the device, and set a
correct IP address.
c. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer: Advise the customer:
1. Check if the specified user has read/write access in a file or folder in the specified desti- 1. Check the connection to the DNS.
nation. 2. Check whether the SMB server name of the transfer destination has been registered in
2. Check if there are any folders with the same name as the specified file name. the DNS.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer: Advise the customer to:
1. Set the DNS server address. 1. Check that network communication between the transfer destination SMB server and this
2. set the SMB server address of the transfer destination using IP address. device is available, by checking:
a. The connection of network cables.
b. The TCP/IP settings.
c. For communication through port 137 (UDP), port 138 (UDP) and port 139 (TCP).
2. Check the network settings that follow to see if the computer operates as an SMB server.
a. Check that the file sharing service for Microsoft network is enabled.
b. Check that NetBIOS over TCP/IP is enabled in the TCP/IP settings.
c. Check the file sharing service (communications through port 137 (UDP), port 138
(UDP) and port 139 (TCP) is allowed in the firewall settings.
3. For communication that goes beyond the subnet, check the WINS server settings and
check whether the server name address can be resolved correctly.
4. Check whether the NetBIOS interface device at the transfer destination SMB server has
started.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Advise the customer to change the file name/destination folder on the SMB scan server. Else,
move or delete the files in the destination folder.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check if the specified file name already exists on the server. 1. Manually delete the lock directory (*.LCK) from the transfer destination.
2. Check if the specified file name is in use. 2. Check whether a folder with the same name as the specified name already exists.
3. Check if the specified file name already exists as a directory.
4. Check if a prohibited character was detected in the specified file name.
5. Check that the specified file name can be created in the storage destination.
6. Check whether the specified file name is being used by another user.
7. Check if a file or folder with the same name as the specified file name exists.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to manually delete the lock directory (*.LCK) from the transfer destination, Advise the customer to check that the storage destination has enough free space.
then retry the job.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to log in to the SMB server from another PC using the same user name Advise the customer to set File Name Conflict instead of Cancel Job.
and check whether they can write a file into the same storage destination on that SMB server.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check that the file format is not set to Multi-page when Add is selected Advise the customer to check that the NEXTNAME.DAT file is correct when Add is selected for
for File Name Conflict. File Name Conflict.
Procedure 027-548 SMB protocol error (4-008), the scan user name specification is incorrect
Advise the customer to check that the server name of the SMB server is correct.
Procedure
Advise the customer to have the system administrator set the domain name and user name
correctly.
027-578 SMB protocol error (4-038), communication timeout has occurred. Procedure
Advise the customer to check if the SMB client has been started.
Procedure
Advise the customer to check that the authentication server and the device can communicate
through the network (check the network group, TCP/IP settings, check the communication at
Port No. 137 (UDP)/Port No. 138 (UDP)/Port No. 139 (TCP).
Procedure 027-589 SMB protocol error (4-049), the user account is locked out.
Advise the customer to request the system administrator to disable the change password at
next login setting. Procedure
1. Advise the customer to request the system administrator to enable the user account.
2. If the fault persists, refer to GP 15 Obtaining Audit and Device Logs, then escalate the
problem to 2nd Level support.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Advise the customer to check that the domain of the destination mail address is not designated
as a prohibited domain.
Procedure 027-703 The certificate for the destination expired (before connection to the server).
Ensure the network cable is connected correctly.
027-704 The certificate for the destination is not reliable (before connection to the server).
027-705 The certificate for the destination existed on a list of revoked certificates (before con-
nection to the server).
027-708 The device certificate is not reliable (before connection to the server).
027-709 The certificate for the destination existed on a list of revoked certificates (before con-
nection to the server).
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to:
a. Store the correct certificate for the destination in the device. Check the items that fol-
low:
i. That the term for which the certificate is valid.
ii. The device’s time is correct.
b. Check the certification path for the destination certificate and import the necessary
CA certificate.
c. Store in this device a destination certificate that is not on the list of revoked certifi-
cates.
d. Check that the mail address written on the device certificate is the same as that set
up on the device.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
027-713 Receive S/MIME tampered mail deleted. 1. Advise the customer to disable the flag that prohibits receiving of unreliable mail.
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
027-714 S/MIME mail sender impersonation error. 3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to:
a. Enable S/MIME setting in the device.
b. Register the sender certificate in the device or change the mailer options so that the
S/MIME signature mails from the sender will be sent with the certificate.
c. Check that the signature bearer of the CA certificate is registered in the device.
d. Check that the mail address written on the device certificate is the same as that set
up on the device.
e. Check that the appropriate certificate is registered and is set as the S/MIME certifi-
cate in the device.
2. Advise the customer that the sender needs to send a mail that is signed with a valid certif-
icate because the sender certificate has expired.
3. Advise the customer that the device may be blocking the attacks.
4. Reload the software, GP 9.
5. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer: 1. Advise the customer to check the user name and password to be entered for creating a
a. That if a number of documents is specified for scanning, scan one document and job flow.
store it. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
b. That when scanning and storing are successful, change the application interface
timeout value. If scanning and storing are not successful, perform step c.
c. To check that the scan document can be uploaded from the PC browser. When
uploading is successful, change the application interface timeout value.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
027-725 Application interface during web service interface - job operation failure. Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
027-726 Application interface during web service interface - unknown job status.
1. Advise the customer to check the parameters for creating a job flow.
Procedure 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check that the application interface is working correctly.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check that the server disk is normal and has free space, and then retry the operation. 1. Check that the SSL setting for the job template server is enabled.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Using the HTTPS protocol, check whether the job template server is accessible from the 1. Enable the SSL settings of the device.
PC. 2. Specify HTTP as the transfer protocol.
2. Check whether the SSL server certificate of the job template server is registered in the
device.
3. Check whether the SSL server certificate of the job template server is valid. For example,
check t hat:
a. The certificate has not expired yet.
b. The time that is set in the device is correct.
c. It is not in the discard list.
d. The certificate path of the SSL server certificate and import any necessary CA certif-
icate.
4. If the certificate is not registered in the job template server, disable the device certificate
validation.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to request the system administrator to set the resource of the stor- 1. Advise the customer to check the user information:
age destination path from the client PC. a. Set the log-in name and password in the job template file storage destination.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9. b. From some other PC connected to the network, check that they can log in with the
relevant account.
c. From a client PC, set a login name and password as a resource
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Reload the software, GP 9. 1. Advise the customer to:
2. If the fault persist, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP. a. Wait a while then try again as scanned images may cause the HDD to be full.
b. Delete the files in the HDD.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016-210, 506, 777, 780, 798 HDD Error RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to set the parameters related to the job template pool server. 1. Advise the customer to check the connection to the DNS and whether the job template
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9. pool server domain name has been registered in the DNS.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
3. Reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to: 1. Advise the customer to enable the service.
a. Not link the box to the instruction that requires user entry. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
b. Set preset values for the items in the instruction requiring user entry.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the system data setting of the XDW/PDF signature and the 1. Advise the customer to:
signature setting that is specified in the instruction. If the system data setting is different a. Check the server/network connection.
from the setting in the instruction, either change the instruction or change the system
b. Check the communication route that can be reached.
data.
c. Ping the DNS server.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
d. Check if the CA certificate of the connection destination server is imported to the
device by using the browser.
e. Check if the device does not go through the proxy that SSL has the function to check
the communication details SSL.
f. Specify the device as out of the SSL proxy target.
g. Check if the server supports the relevant encryption method.
h. Set the client certificate to the device.
i. Import the client certificate to the device and set to use as the client certificate.
j. Check the daylight saving time difference to see if the date/time of the device is cor-
rect.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check whether the login name and password have been set correctly. 1. Check whether the device network settings are set correctly.
2. Consult with the Network Administrator to check the authentication settings at the LDAP 2. Consult with the network administrator to check the connection status from the device to
Server. the reference server.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to:
1. Advise the customer to: 1. If on-demand print for multiple documents was instructed using the external access func-
a. Check if the parameter setting specified in XDOD client is out of system specifica- tion, reduce the number of documents then retry it.
tions. 2. Either extend the print on demand print duration or set it to 0.
b. Check the XDOD client and controller versions. When using the external access function to instruct printing of multiple documents by on
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9. demand print, the device does not take the print processing time into consideration until
the last document is received. Therefore, for cases of large volume documents or compli-
cated documents that require long data processing time, the device may issue timeout
even before receiving the last document. Set the validity time according to the document
format to be printed.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to repeat the print instruction. Advise the customer to:
1. Check if the external accounting server is working correctly.
2. Connect the cable correctly.
3. Set up the device so that it can correctly communicate with the external accounting
server.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check that network communication between the transfer destination AirPrint scan client 1. Check that the scan document destination WebDAV server is registered in DNS.
and the device is available. 2. Check that the DNS server connection is good.
2. Check whether the AirPrint scan client has enough free capacity. 3. Check that the DNS server is correctly configured.
3. Check the network cable connection.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check that the proxy server name that is configured on the device is registered in DNS. 1. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server.
2. Check that the DNS server connection is good. 2. Check the scan document SSL settings of the destination WebDAV server.
3. Check that the address of the DNS server is correctly configured. 3. Check the scan document destination WebDAV server name and server path name.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server. 1. Check the network cable connection.
2. Ensure the device is registered. 2. Check the access from the PC to the Scan document destination WebDAV server.
3. Ensure the scan SSL server certificate of the document destination WebDAV server is 3. Ensure the correct network interface is selected.
correct. For example:
a. Check the expiration date.
b. Check that the device time is correct.
c. Check that they are not on the disposal list.
d. Check the SSL server certificate of the certification path.
4. If the Scan document certificate to the destination WebDAV server is not registered, dis-
able the certificate validation of the device.
027-774 Unavailable letters were specified as a destination SMTP address (after connection to Procedure
the server).
Advise the customer to reduce the number of mail addresses.
027-776 The SMTP server refused the EHLO command (after connection to the server).
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
• Use only ASCII letters for the device host name and destination address, then rerun the
job.
• Contact the network administrator for advice and check that the SMTP server supports
the HELO and EHLO commands.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to send mail without setting SMTP-AUTH. Advise the customer to contact the network administrator to check what SMTP authentication
method the server uses.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to contact the network administrator to: Advise the customer to select the network interface that can be used.
1. Refer to the Mail Communication Protocol Report and check whether any 535 SMTP
authentication error response were notified from the server.
2. Perform the same corrective actions as for a user.
3. When in an environment where the SMTP Server Settings cannot be changed (when
using a hosting service, etc.). Refer to the SMTP error extension code and, if 535 5.7.0
authorization failure has occurred, change 700-809 (CE) SMTP AUTH Priority Authenti-
cation Method and try again.
0: Default setting GSSAPI > NTLM > CRAM-MD5 > LOGIN > PLAIN
1: Use PLAIN as priority authentication method
2: Use LOGIN as priority authentication method
3: Use CRAM-MD5 as priority authentication method
4: Use NTLM as priority authentication method
5: Use GSSAPI as priority authentication method
NOTE: Before updating this, check the latest system data list as there could have been
additions of new authentication methods. Depending on the provider, even if one has
claimed to support CRAM-MD5, there might be cases where it is difficult to connect using
CRAM-MD5 from this device and this could result in an error.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to split the scan data. Advise the customer to check the redirection settings of the WebDAV server.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to check that the user name and password for the proxy server that was
1. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server. configured on the device are correct.
2. Check the login user name and password.
3. Check the scan document destination WebDAV server name and server path name.
Procedure 027-793 Error number 4XX returned from the WebDAV server.
Advise the customer to set File Name Conflict to anything other than Cancel Job.
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Check that the drive and directory that are specified in the WebDAV server that sends
scanned documents are accessible.
2. Perform the operation again.
027-791 WebDAV server 405 method not allowed. 027-792 WebDAV server 409 conflict.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check that the WebDAV server is operating correctly. 1. Advise the customer to correct the settings, then repeat the operation.
2. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to specify the output destination that can be processed by the 1. Advise the customer to select another document, then repeat the operation.
device, then repeat the operation. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure
Advise the customer to check whether or not there is free space in the storage location.
Procedure Procedure
As necessary, perform either the 024-910, 946, 959 Tray 1 Size Mismatch RAP or the 024-
911, 912, 913, 947, 948, 949, 960, 961, 962 Option Feeder Size Mismatch RAP.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
Install a new fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1.
029-701 The response from the server does not meet the specifications of the WebDAV. Procedure
Advise the customer to retry the same operation.
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Ensure that the WebDAV server is operational.
2. Verify the configuration of the server .
3. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server.
Procedure
Advise the customer to check whether the URL information of the PACFile is correctly regis-
tered in the DHCP server.
Procedure
Advise the customer to confirm the server setting and connection status.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. If the fault persists, advise the customer to contact the System Administrator.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the 075-911 MSI Tray Out of Position RAP. Advise the customer to switch off the fax send billing function or change to a single-line instal-
lation.
033-315 USB fax class driver notifies that a fatal error has occurred.
033-316 An error has occurred at the device cont section in fax controller.
033-317 An error has occurred at the fax device section in fax controller.
033-319 Due to an error during fax cont 2 software processing, subsequent processes cannot
be performed.
033-320 The system side did not respond within the specified time on booting.
033-321 The fax card did not respond within the specified time on booting.
033-327 During fax communication, the FCM stopped responding and even though a commu-
nication interrupt request was issued to the FCM, it remained unresponsive.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to principles of Operation Fax system overview.
033-329 A fax controller error was detected. 033-331 The initialization process with the FoIP controller has failed.
033-340 The Pflite communication log write function returned an error. 033-332 The FoIP controller did not respond within the specified time on booting.
Procedure 033-333 The FoIP controller did not respond within the specified time after entering sleep
mode.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Initialize the hard disk, perform dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics. 033-334 The FoIP message sending function returns NG.
2. Perform dC301 NVM Initialization.
3. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP. 033-335 A fault notification due to an invalid fault code was received from the fax card or FoIP.
Procedure
Perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP. Switch the machine off, then on, GP 4.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the status of the remote machine, If the remote machine is
good, repeat the operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check if the remote machine has the relevant function.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to request for the sender to check the remote machine for an error,
then re-send.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
033-552 When receiving G3 image data, the detected total number of error lines exceeded the
threshold value indicated in the system data.
033-578 The frame size of received command exceeded the specification value.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to request for the sender to check the remote machine for an error,
then re-send.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure 033-537 A conflict between outgoing and incoming calls has occurred and the sending was
cancelled.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the recipient’s address, folder information, etc. then repeat
033-538 During the image processing of fax send, an error has occurred in the fax card.
the operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP. 033-539 During the image processing of fax receive, an error has occurred in the fax card.
033-540 During the image processing for fax print format, an error has occurred.
033-568 During fax communication, there was no response from the FCM for the specified
time.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
033-566 The fax card is unable to call because there is no dial. 033-567 There is incorrect (illegal) data in the dial data.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: For information only. No service action necessary.
1. Advise the customer to check the address number and whether the remote party is a fax
machine.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure 033-551 When a phone or fax communication was about to end, an operation was performed
on that job.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Use a phone to establish communications, then Advise the customer to repeat the opera-
033-583 The request received a connection refused response because the target connection is
tion. temporarily out of resource.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to wait for a while, then repeat the operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to wait for the job to complete its transmission, then repeat the oper- 1. Advise the customer to consult with the operator of the remote machine on whether the
ation. wrong F Code was input.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP. 2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
033-561 TRESS and RCC cannot be performed as the operation is prohibited or a Job is in 033-569 The paper tray status is such that paper with orientation that can be output can only
progress. be supplied from the SMH.
033-562 RCC execution was put on hold as it is in the operation prohibited mode. Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
Procedure 1. Advise the customer to specify the correct paper size and check that the paper trays are
Perform the steps that follow: correctly loaded with the paper guides correctly adjusted.
1. For a single occurrence, take no action. 2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
033-570 An error due to power off during transmission. the power switch was turned off, or the 033-588 T38 packet loss causing unrecoverable error was detected.
system was reset.
Procedure
Procedure Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow: 1. Advise the customer to wait for some of the jobs that are queued to be completed or can-
1. Advise the customer to: celled, then retry the operation.
a. Check the power and line status. 2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
b. Wait for a while then check the fax function settings and dial numbers, then resend
data if needed.
c. Check the self-terminal status and line status, then perform the operation again.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to:
a. Wait for a while, then try to send again.
b. Make it so that the IP address can be obtained and registered to the registrar server.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to request for the sender to check the remote machine for an error,
then re-send.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to request for the sender to re-send. 1. Advise the customer to:
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP. a. Repeat the operation if the fault occurs while sending.
b. Request for the sender to re-send if the fault occurs when receiving.
c. Check the remote machine for an error.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
033-718 The document was not found in the polling sending box or the specified folder.
033-719 The document was not found in the polling sending box or the specified folder.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. For a single occurrence, take no action. 1. Inform the customer that the optional hard disk drive is required, PL 18.2 Item 91.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP. 2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
033-742 Timed out by page read close instruction (ran out of memory during manual send). 033-728 Formatting for fax auto print was aborted because the instruction for fax manual print
was sent during the operation.
Procedure
Advise the customer to delete unnecessary data from the hard disk. 033-734 Job was cancelled because fax print and fax auto report were started at the same
time.
Procedure 033-737 The fax controller detected a failure and could not continue processing the job.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to delete unnecessary data from the hard disk, then resend the fax. 033-738 The fax controller detected an error in JBIG data during coding/decoding of the JBIG
2. If the fault occurred during an immediate send operation, increase the NVM value for data.
scan memory threshold for immediate send scan, dC131 NVM Read/Write (NVM location
820-053). 033-751 An activity report is generated during the time period where print is prohibited and
3. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP. since the machine is in sleep mode, it started the process to place the report on hold.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. For a single occurrence, take no action.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
033-747 When requesting to start the service from the fax card, the job could not be generated 033-744 When receiving image data from the fax card, the conditions for sending the response
due to causes such as job number overflow. to the fax card did not match.
033-749 During fax formatting, the extended image data is larger than the memory reserved. 033-745 When receiving image data from the fax card, the conditions for sending the response
to the fax card did not match.
Procedure
033-746 When transferring image data to the fax card, the conditions for sending the response
For information only. No service action necessary.
to the fax card did not match.
033-750 During formatting, when image data was retrieved from the fax card, even though the
image data was determined to be free from error, extension failed.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow: not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch the machine off, then on, GP 4.
Perform the steps that follow:
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
1. Switch the machine off, then on, GP 4.
3. Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
3. If the fault persists, there are no further service actions, contact 2nd level support.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow: not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch the machine off, then on, GP 4.
2. Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch the machine off, then on, GP 4.
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
3. dC301 NVM Initialization.
4. Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
The +24VDC supply must be switched on before testing motors, solenoids and clutches (com-
ponent control code 041-001). To avoid damage to the machine, switch off the +24VDC supply CAUTION
when testing is complete. The +24VDC supply must be switched on before testing motors, solenoids and clutches (com-
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary: ponent control code 041-001). To avoid damage to the machine, switch off the +24VDC supply
when testing is complete.
• GP 10 How to Check a Motor.
Switch the machine off, then on, GP 4. The error persists.
• Principles of Operation Drives.
Y N
Switch the machine off, then on, GP 4. The error persists.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Enter dC330 code 042-001 to test the main fan rotation, (PL 4.1 Item 13). The fan fails to
rotate correctly.
Enter dC330 code 071-001 to run the main motor. The motor fails to run correctly. Y N
Y N
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Refer to WD 4 and PJ Locations. Check the connections between the LVPS PWBA (P/J501),
Refer to WD 6 and PJ Locations. Check the connections between the main motor (P/J311) and
and the MCU PWBA (P/J29). The connections are good.
the LVPS PWBA (P/J509), and the connection between the main motor (P/J171) and MCU
Y N
PWBA (P/J17). The connections are good. Secure the connections for P/J501 and P/J29.
Y N
Secure the connections for P/J311, P/J509, P/J171 and P/J17.
Check the continuity between the LVPS PWBA (P/J501), and the MCU PWBA (P/J29). The
continuity is good.
Refer to WD 6 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the cables connected between the
Y N
main motor and the MCU PWBA (P/J171 and P/J17). The continuity is good.
Install a new top harness assembly.
Y N
Install a new drive harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 1.
Refer to WD 4 and PJ Locations. Check connections between the main fan and the LVPS
PWBA (P/J503). The connection is good.
Refer to WD 6 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the cables connected between the Y N
main motor and the LVPS PWBA (P/J311 and P/J509). The continuity is good.
Re-seat loose fan harness connector.
Y N
Install a new top harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 4. Manually rotate the fan. The fan rotates freely.
Y N
Refer to WD 6 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switch(es), then check if the voltage
Install a new main fan assembly, PL 4.1 Item 13.
between the LVPS PWBA ground and the P/J509 pin 1 is approximately +24VDC. The volt-
age is correct.
Refer to OF 18 +24VDC Power RAP.
Y N
Install new components as necessary:
Refer to OF 18 +24VDC Power RAP.
• Main fan assembly, PL 4.1 Item 13.
Install a new main drive assembly, PL 3.1 Item 1. • LVPS PWBA, PL 18.1 Item 14.
042-610 Turn slow mode detection failed. High temperature caused printing speed restraint. Procedure
Initial Actions
WARNING
• Printing has been suspended because inside of the device is extraordinarily hot. Wait until
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
the error message turns off with the power to the device switch on.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
• Ensure the printer is positioned to allow adequate airflow at all vents. Refer to GP 22, death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Installation Space Requirements.
• Clear vents of any dust accumulation.
CAUTION
The +24VDC supply must be switched on before testing motors, solenoids and clutches (com-
ponent control code 041-001). To avoid damage to the machine, switch off the +24VDC supply
Procedure when testing is complete.
NOTE: The Sub motor is also referred to as the PH motor within this service manual.
WARNING Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do • GP 10 How to Check a Motor.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause • Principles of Operation Drives.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch the machine off, then on, GP 4. The error persists.
Y N
CAUTION Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
The +24VDC supply must be switched on before testing motors, solenoids and clutches (com-
Enter dC330 code 071-004 to run the sub motor. The motor fails to run correctly.
ponent control code 041-001). To avoid damage to the machine, switch off the +24VDC supply
Y N
when testing is complete.
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Check the function of the main fan, refer to 042-335, 042-398 Main Fan Failure RAP. The
error persists. Refer to WD 6 and PJ Locations. Check the connections between the sub motor (P/J312) and
Y N the LVPS PWBA (P/J509), and the connection between the sub motor (P/J172) and MCU
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. PWBA (P/J17). The connections are good.
Y N
Perform the 010-319 to 10-355 Fuser Thermal Error RAP. Secure the connections for P/J312, P/J509, P/J172 and P/J17.
Refer to WD 6 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the cables connected between the
sub motor and the MCU PWBA (P/J172 and P/J17). The continuity is good.
Y N
Install a new drive harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 1.
Refer to WD 6 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the cables connected between the
sub motor and the LVPS PWBA (P/J312 and P/J509). The continuity is good.
Y N
Install a new top harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 4.
Refer to WD 6 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switch(es), then check if the voltage
between the LVPS PWBA ground and the P/J509 pin 1 is approximately +24VDC. The volt-
age is correct.
Y N
Refer to OF 18 +24VDC Power RAP.
Procedure
1. Switch the machine off, then on, GP 4.
2. Refer to (WD 9 C405) or (WD 10 C400) and PJ Locations. Check the connection between
the ESS PWBA (P/J920) and the MCU PWBA (P/J10).
3. Refer to (WD 9 C405) or (WD 10 C400) and PJ Locations. Check the the continuity of the
cables connected between the ESS PWBA (P/J920) and the MCU PWBA (P/J10).
4. Install new components as necessary
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
• Main harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 2.
• MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
058-311 Over temperature of the fuser assembly detected by the STS sensor. Procedure
058-312 The fuser assembly fuse has failed.
WARNING
059-326 The AD value of the fuser STS sensor exceeds the specified detection count.
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
Procedure death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the 010-105, 010-106 Fuser Thermal Error RAP.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
Install a new fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1.
Procedure
Perform the 092-316 Environment Temperature Sensor Fail RAP
WARNING
Procedure
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause • GP 11 How to Check a Sensor.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch the machine off, then on, GP 4. 1. Switch the machine off, then on, GP 4.
2. Refer to WD 17 and PJ Locations. Check the connections between the ESS PWBA, PL 2. Ensure that the DADF, PL 50.1 Item 1 open and closes correctly. Check the left counter
18.2 Item 4 and the DADF, PL 50.1 Item 1, (P/J1371 and P/J1377) for an open circuit, balance assembly, PL 50.1 Item 3 and the right counterbalance assembly, PL 50.1 Item
short circuit or poor contact. 4. If necessary, install new DADF assembly, PL 50.1 Item 1.
3. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary: 3. Refer to WD 17 and PJ Locations. Check the connections between the ESS PWBA, PL
• DADF assembly, PL 50.1 Item 1. 18.2 Item 4 and the IIT assembly, PL 50.1 Item 2, (P/J1370, P/J1372 and P/J1374) for an
open circuit, short circuit or poor contact.
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
4. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• IIT assembly, PL 50.1 Item 2.
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
062-396 Connection problem with the CIS flat cable was detected.
Initial Actions
Perform ADJ 50.1 Scanner Cleaning Procedure.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch the machine off, then on, GP 4.
2. Reload the software, GP 9.
3. Refer to WD 17 and PJ Locations. Check the connections between the ESS PWBA, PL
18.2 Item 4 and the IIT assembly, PL 50.1 Item 2, (P/J1370, P/J1372 and P/J1374) for an
open circuit, short circuit or poor contact.
4. Refer to WD 17 and PJ Locations. Check the connections between the ESS PWBA, PL
18.2 Item 4 and the DADF, PL 50.1 Item 1, (P/J1371 and P/J1377) for an open circuit,
short circuit or poor contact.
5. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• IIT assembly, PL 50.1 Item 2.
• DADF assembly, PL 50.1 Item 1.
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch the machine off, then on, GP 4.
2. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
065-222 CIS AOC Failure. The AOC process did not complete.
Procedure
Perform the 062-277, 062-316 DADF Failure RAP.
Check the retard (PL 9.1 Item 4), feed, and nudger rollers (PL 15.2 Item 7) for excessive wear
or contamination. The rollers are undamaged and clean.
Y N
Clean the rollers with a cloth that is slightly dampened with water. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions
A
Launch Issue February 2017 Status Indicator RAPs
Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer 2-375 071-101
A
072-101, 072-103 Tray 2 Misfeed Jam RAP Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions
72-101-00 The path sensor is not turned on within the specified time.
Perform the OF 12 550 Option Registration Clutch Assembly RAP. The fault persists.
72-103-00 The path sensor on jam. Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Initial Actions
• Check media condition. Perform the OF 13 550 Option Drive Assembly RAP. The motor runs.
• Check for obstructions in the media path. Y N
• Check tray 2 media guides and lift operation. Install a 550 Option drive assembly, PL 10.1 Item 9.
Perform the OF 12 550 Option Registration Clutch Assembly RAP. The fault persists.
Y N
WARNING
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Perform the OF 13 550 Option Drive Assembly RAP. The motor runs.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Y N
Install a 550 Option drive assembly, PL 10.1 Item 9.
CAUTION
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
The +24VDC supply must be switched on before testing motors, solenoids and clutches (com-
ponent control code 041-001). To avoid damage to the machine, switch off the +24VDC supply
when testing is complete.
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
• GP 10 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 11 How to Check a Sensor.
• GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
• Refer to Principles of Operation 550 Option Feeder.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the feed rollers (PL 10.2 Item 3) for excessive wear or contamination. The rollers are
undamaged and clean.
Y N
Clean the rollers with a cloth that is slightly dampened with water. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions
Perform the OF 10 550 Option Main Feed Assembly Path Sensor RAP. The fault per-
sists.
A
Status Indicator RAPs February 2017 Launch Issue
072-101, 072-103 2-376 Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer
072-310 Tray 2 Motor Failure RAP 072-311 Tray 2 Mode Error RAP
072-310 Optional feeder motor alarm signal was detected. 072-311 Option sheet feeder
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
2. Reload the software, GP 9. Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
3. If the faut persists, perform the OF 13 550 Option Drive Assembly RAP.
Remove the Optional 550 sheet feeder, refer to REP 10.1. Reload the software GP 9, then
reinstall the Optional 550 sheet feeder. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. The fault persists. Install a new MSI tray no paper sensor, PL 13.2 Item 4.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the retard (PL 9.1 Item 4), feed, and nudger rollers (PL 15.2 Item 7) for excessive wear
or contamination. The rollers are undamaged and clean.
Y N
Clean the rollers with a cloth that is slightly dampened with water. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions
A B
Launch Issue February 2017 Status Indicator RAPs
Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer 2-379 077-101, 077-119
077-104 Exit Off Jam RAP 077-123 Feeder Regi Sensor On Duplex Jam RAP
077-104 After the fuser exit sensor turned on, the fuser exit Sensor turned off before the spec- 077-123 Paper in the duplex path does not turn on the registration sensor in the specified time.
ified time has passed.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions • Check media condition.
• Check exit sensor actuator operation. • Check for obstructions in the media path.
• Check for obstructions in the media path.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
• GP 10 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 11 How to Check a Sensor.
WARNING
• GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
• Principles of Operations Duplex Feeding.
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
Check the registration sensor actuator (PL 15.2 Item 11) is undamaged and pivots freely. The
• GP 10 How to Check a Motor.
sensor actuator is operational.
• GP 11 How to Check a Sensor. Y N
• GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch. Install a new registration sensor actuator, PL 15.2 Item 11.
Perform the OF 15 Exit Sensor RAP. The fault persists.
Y N Perform the OF 7 Registration Sensor RAP. The fault persists.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions
Perform the OF 16 Exit Drive Assembly Clutch 1 RAP. The fault persists.
Y N Check the exit roller assembly (PL 17.1 Item 14) for excessive wear or contamination. The
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions roll is undamaged and clean.
Y N
Perform the 042-325 Motor Failure RAP. The fault persists. Clean the roll. If necessary install a new exit assembly, PL 17.1 Item 1.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions Perform the OF 17 Exit Drive Assembly Clutch 2 RAP. The fault persists.
Y N
Install a new exit assembly, PL 17.1 Item 1. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions
Check the duplex roll for excessive wear or contamination. The roll is undamaged and
clean.
Y N
Install a new duplex assembly, PL 14.1 Item 1.
Install a new right Interlock switch assembly, PL 18.1 Item 99. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Y N
CAUTION
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
The +24VDC supply must be switched on before testing motors, solenoids and clutches (com-
Check the connections P/J27, DP/DJ271 and P/J419 between the optional 550 sheet feeder ponent control code 041-001). To avoid damage to the machine, switch off the +24VDC supply
PWBA, PL 10.1 Item 10 and the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. The connections are good. when testing is complete.
Y N Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
Secure the connections. • GP 10 How to Check a Motor.
• Principles of Operation Drives.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the cables on P/J419 and DP/DJ271
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
between the optional 550 sheet feeder PWBA and the drawer connector, PL 10.1 Item 13.
Y N
There is continuity in the cables.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Y N
Install a new drawer 1 feeder harness, PL 10.1 Item 13.
Enter dC330 code 071-004 to run the PH motor. The motor fails to run correctly.
Y N
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the cables on P/J27, PL 18.2 Item
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
24 and DP/DJ271 between the MCU PWBA and the drawer connector. There is continuity in
the cables.
Refer to WD 6 and PJ Locations. Check the connections between the PH motor, P/J312 and
Y N
the LVPS PWBA, PL 18.1 Item 14, P/J509, and the connection between the PH motor, P/J172
Install a new main harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 2.
and MCU PWBA,PL 18.2 Item 24, P/J17. The connections are good.
Y N
Install a new optional 550 sheet feeder PWBA, PL 10.1 Item 10. The fault is fixed.
Secure the connections for P/J312, P/J509, P/J172 and P/J17.
Y N
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Refer to WD 6 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the cables connected between the PH
motor and the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24, P/J172 and P/J17. The continuity is good.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Y N
Install a new drive harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 1.
Refer to WD 6 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the cables connected between the PH
motor and the LVPS PWBA, PL 18.1 Item 14, P/J312 and P/J509. The continuity is good.
Y N
Install a new top harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 4.
Refer to WD 6 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switch(es), then check if the voltage
between the LVPS PWBA ground and the P/J509 pin 1 is approximately +24VDC. The volt-
age is correct.
Y N
Perform the OF 18 +24VDC Power RAP.
Perform the 077-123 Feeder Regi Sensor On Duplex Jam RAP. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Perform the OF 10 550 Option Main Feed Assembly Path Sensor RAP.
077-967 APS paper type mismatch, or printing from a tray with different paper type.
Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Refer to WD 4 and PJ Locations. Check the connections between the rear cover interlock sen-
sor PL 14.1 Item 3 and the LVPS PWBA, PL 18.1 Item 14, P/J42. The connection is good.
Y N
Securely attach the connector.
Check if the voltage between the MCU PWBA ground and P/J29 pin 15 is approximately
+5VDC. The voltage is correct.
Y N
Perform the OF 19 +5VDC Power RAP.
Install a new rear Interlock switch harness assembly, PL 14.1 Item 3. The error persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the voltage between the MCU Board ground and P/J29 pin 20 is approximately +5VDC.
WARNING
The voltage is correct. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Y N not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform the OF 19 +5VDC Power RAP. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Check drum cartridge life count. The drum cartridge is at or near end of life.
Install a new toner full sensor, PL 4.1 Item 17 Y N
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions
Check the drum cartridge CRUM connection terminal inside the CRU xerographic devel-
opment assembly. The connection is clean and installed correctly.
Y N
Clean the connector, then reinstall drum cartridge.
Check the connection terminal of the CRUM connector assembly. The connection ter-
minal is good.
Y N
Install a new CRUM connector assembly, PL 8.1 Item 1.
A B
Status Indicator RAPs February 2017 Launch Issue
091-400, 405, 911, 091-401, 402, 411, 421, 431, 480, 2-386 Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer
A B
Refer to WD 12 and PJ Locations. Check the CRUM connections of the xerographic har- 091-914 to 091-919, 091-920 to 091-928 Drum Comm Error
ness assembly and the MCU PWBA, PL 8.1 Item 8 (P/J12, P/J121, P/J122, P/J123, P/
J124). The connections are good. RAP
Y N 091-914 K Drum CRUM communication error.
Securely attach the connectors.
091-915 K Drum CRUM Data broken.
Refer to WD 12 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the xerographic harness
assembly, P/J12, P/J121, P/J122, P/J123, P/J124, PL 8.1 Item 8. The continuity is 091-916 K Drum CRUM data mismatch.
good.
Y N 091-917 Y Drum CRUM communication error.
Install a new xerographic harness assembly, PL 8.1 Item 8.
091-918 M Drum CRUM communication error.
Install a new CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit):
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - Y, PL 8.1 Item 95. 091-919 C Drum CRUM communication error.
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - M, PL 8.1 Item 96.
091-920 Y Drum CRUM data broken.
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - C, PL 8.1 Item 98.
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - K, PL 8.1 Item 99. 091-922 M Drum CRUM data broken.
The fault persists.
Y N 091-923 C Drum CRUM data broken.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions
091-924 Y Drum CRUM data mismatch.
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
091-925 M Drum CRUM data mismatch.
Install a new xerographic development assembly, PL 8.1. The fault persists.
Y N 091-926 M Drum CRUM data mismatch.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions
091-928 M Drum data mismatch.
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Initial Actions
• Verify drum cartridge is genuine Xerox.
• Inspect the drum cartridge xerographic connector.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Procedure
Perform the 091-401, 402, 411, 421, 431, 480, 481, 482, 913, Drum Cartridge Life RAP.
091-921 K Drum CRUM is not positioned correctly. • CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - C, PL 8.1 Item 98.
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - K, PL 8.1 Item 99.
091-927 Y Drum CRUM is not positioned correctly.
Install a new CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit):
091-928 M Drum CRUM is not positioned correctly. • CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - Y, PL 8.1 Item 95.
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - M, PL 8.1 Item 96.
091-929 C Drum CRUM is not positioned correctly.
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - C, PL 8.1 Item 98.
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - K, PL 8.1 Item 99.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions
Check if the CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) is correct for this printer
and installed in the correct color location. The imaging unit is the correct part and installed
in the correct location.
Y N
Install the correct CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit):
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - Y, PL 8.1 Item 95.
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - M, PL 8.1 Item 96.
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - C, PL 8.1 Item 98.
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - K, PL 8.1 Item 99.
Check the connection terminal of the CRUM inside the CRU xeroxgraphic developement
assembly. The connection terminal is good and not broken.
Y N
Install a new CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit):
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - Y, PL 8.1 Item 95.
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - M, PL 8.1 Item 96.
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - C, PL 8.1 Item 98.
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - K, PL 8.1 Item 99.
Check the connection terminal of the CRUM connector assembly. The connection terminal
is good and not broken.
Y N
Install a new CRUM connector assembly, PL 8.1 Item 1. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions
A
Status Indicator RAPs February 2017 Launch Issue
091-921, 927, 928, 929 2-388 Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer
A
092-316 Environment Temperature Sensor Fail RAP Install a new ROS assembly, PL 2.1 Item 1. The fault persists.
Y N
092-316 Environment temperature sensor failure.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to WD 8 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the ROS assembly (PL 2.1
Item 1) and the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24, (P/J3411, P/J36, P/J111, and P/J11). The con-
nections are good.
Y N
Ensure the P/J connections are securely attached.
Refer to WD 8 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the ROS assembly (PL 2.1
Item 1) and the LVPS PWBA, PL 18.1 Item 14, (P/J432, P/J431 and P/J43). The connec-
tions are good.
Y N
Ensure the P/J connections are securely attached.
Refer to WD 8 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the cables on P/J43 and P/J431
between the LVPS PWBA and the ROS assembly. There is continuity in the cables.
Y N
Install a new top harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 4.
Refer to WD 8 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switches then check if the voltage
between the LVPS PWBA ground and the P/J43 pin 2 is approximately +5VDC. The voltage
is correct.
Y N
Install a new LVPS PWBA, PL 18.1 Item 14.
Refer to WD 8 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switches then check if the voltage
between the MCU PWBA ground and the P/J36 pin 1 is approximately +24VDC. The voltage
is correct.
Y N
Perform the OF 18 +24VDC Power RAP.
Refer to WD 8 and PJ Locations. Check if the voltage between the MCU PWBA ground and
the P/J11 pin 1 is approximately +3.3VDC. The voltage is correct.
Y N
Perform the OF 20 +3.3VDC Power RAP.
A
Launch Issue February 2017 Status Indicator RAPs
Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer 2-389 092-316
092-318, 092- 319 to 092-321 ADC Patch Failure RAP 093-320 Developer Motor Fail RAP
092-318 The TC/SAD patch of Y color is abnormally pale. 093-320 Developer motor rotation is not correct.
WARNING CAUTION
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Switch off the +24VDC supply after testing motors, solenoids, and clutches. The +24VDC low
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause voltage power supply must be switch on when testing motors, solenoids, and clutches, (dC330
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Component control code 041.001) then switched off to avoid damage to the machine.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
2. Remove, then shake the toner cartridge, PL 5.1. • GP 10 How to Check a Motor.
3. Reinstall the toner cartridge. • Principles of Operation Drives.
4. Remove then install the appropriate CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
unit), PL 8.1. Y N
5. Install a new toner cartridge, PL 5.1. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
6. Install a new CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit):
Execute dC330 code 093-001, and check the developer motor. The motor fails to run.
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - Y, PL 8.1 Item 95. Y N
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - M, PL 8.1 Item 96. Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - C, PL 8.1 Item 98.
• CRU xerographic development assembly (imaging unit) - K, PL 8.1 Item 99. Refer to WD 6 and PJ Locations. Check the connections between the developer motor (P/
J331) and the MCU PWBA (P/J33). The connections are good.
Y N
Secure the connections for P/J331 and P/J33.
Refer to WD 6 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the cables connected between the PH
motor and the MCU PWBA (P/J331 and P/J33). The continuity is good.
Y N
Install a new drive harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 1.
Refer to WD 6 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switch(es). Check if the voltage between
the MCU PWBA ground and the P/J33 pin 2 is approximately +24VDC. The voltage is cor-
rect.
Y N
Perform the OF 18 +24VDC Power RAP.
Install a new toner cartridge, PL 5.1. The fault persists. install a new toner cartridge, PL 5.1.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check toner CRUM connector condition. The toner CRUM assembly is good.
Y N
Install a new toner cartridge, PL 5.1.
Check the connection terminal of the dispenser assembly. The connector is good.
Y N
Install a new dispenser assembly, PL 5.1.
Refer to WD 14 and PJ Locations. Check the connections between the dispenser assembly (P/
J191, P/J192, P/J193 and P/J194) and the MCU PWBA (P/J19). The connections are good.
Y N
Secure the connections.
Refer to WD 14 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the cables connected between the
between the dispenser assembly (P/J191, P/J192, P/J193 and P/J194) and the MCU PWBA
(P/J19). The continuity is good.
Y N
Install a new top harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 4.
094-310 CTD Sensor LED off condition exceeds upper limit. • IQ2 Light or Undertoned Print RAP.
• IQ12 Fog, Background Contamination.
094-319 CTD Sensor contamination detected. • IQ20 Color Registration is Out of Alignment.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follow as necessary:
• GP 11 How to Check a Sensor.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the CTD Sensor surface for smears or foreign objects, PL 6.1 Item 14. The sensor is
clean.
Y N
Switch off the machine, GP 4. Clean the CTD sensor surface by wiping with a clean and
dry, soft cotton swab, or remove the foreign objects.
Check the CTD sensor assembly installation. The CTD sensor assembly is installed cor-
rectly.
Y N
Reseat the color toner density (CTD) sensor, PL 6.1 Item 14.
Refer to WD 13 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the CTD sensor assembly
and the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24, (P/J251 and P/J27). The connections are good.
Y N
Securely attach the connectors.
Refer to WD 13 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the cables in the harness between
P/J251 and P/J27, connecting the CTD Sensor assembly and the MCU PWBA. The continu-
ity is good.
Y N
Install a new main harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 2.
Refer to WD 13 and PJ Locations. Check if the voltage between the MCU PWBA ground and
P/J27 pin 13 is approximately +5VDC. The voltage is approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Refer to OF 19 +5VDC Power.
Install a new color toner density (CTD) sensor, PL 6.1 Item 14.
WARNING Procedure
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
WARNING death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Y N
WARNING
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Install a new transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 97. Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the transfer belt assembly is installed correctly, PL 6.1 Item 1. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Refer to WD 12 and PJ Locations. Check the connection of the Faston connector on the BTR
harness, (PL 18.2 Item 33) to the transfer HVPS TR PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 30. The connec-
tion is good.
Y N
Securely attach the connector.
Refer to WD 12 and PJ Locations. Check the wiring between the transfer HVPS TR PWBA, PL
18.2 Item 30, (P/J1821) and the development HVPS XD PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 25, (P/J182).
The wiring and connections are good.
Y N
Securely attach the connector. If necessary install a new HVPS harness assembly, PL
18.3 Item 5.
Refer to WD 12 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the development HVPS XD
PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 25, (P/J182) and the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24, (PJ18). The con-
nections are good.
Y N
Secure the connections. If necessary install a new MCU-HVPS flat flex connector, PL
18.3 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
Information only. No service action necessary. Advise the customer that the IBT is almost at Perform the 093-924, 927, 928, 926, 929, 937, 938, 939 Toner CRUM Communication Fail
end of life. RAP.
099-397 Slow heat center temperature sensor, specified temperature has not been reached in
the specified time.
099-398 Fast heat center temperature sensor, over temperature has been detected.
Procedure
Perform the 010-319 to 10-355 Fuser Thermal Error RAP.
102-312 It was detected that MAC address of another M/C was recorded in the dongle during Procedure
the initial installation by the USB dongle.
102-313 An illegal IOT speed setting key was detected during the initial installation by the usb WARNING
dongle.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
102-314 Setting the IOT speed setting key failed during the initial installation by the USB don-
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
gle.
Perform the steps that follow:
102-315 Setting the SW Key failed during the initial installation by the USB dongle. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, (PL 18.2 Item 4) are securely connected.
102-316 Setting the supply setting failed during the initial installation by the USB dongle. Ensure all surface mounted modules on the ESS PWBA (PL 18.2 Item 4) are securely
connected.
102-317 Setting the page pack failed during the initial installation by the USB dongle. 3. Initialise the hard disk, refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics.
4. Reload the software, GP 9.
102-318 Setting the country code failed during the initial installation by the USB dongle.
5. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the LONGDIAG MODE routine.
102-319 The NVM rewriting list process failed during the initial installation by the USB dongle. 6. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Ensure the USB dongle is installed correctly.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
3. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, (PL 18.2 Item 4) are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules on the ESS PWBA (PL 18.2 Item 4) are securely
connected.
4. Reload the software, GP 9.
5. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the LONGDIAG MODE routine.
6. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
103-312 The secure watermark kit cannot be made available because the hybrid watermark WARNING
detection hardware for document side 2 is not installed.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
103-313 The secure watermark kit did not become available because of insufficient IISS exten-
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
sion memory.
Perform the steps that follow:
Procedure 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
For information only. No service action necessary. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, (PL 18.2 Item 4) are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules the ESS PWBA are securely connected.
3. Initialise the hard disk, refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics.
4. Reload the software, GP 9.
5. If the fault persists, install new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
116-211 Media reader connection cable disconnected. 116-220 The downloader software that processes downloads within the ESS failed to initialize
during transition into download mode.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform the steps that follow: death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Perform the steps that follow:
2. Check the connectors on the USB harness. If necessary install a new USB harness, PL 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
18.2 Item 12. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9. Make sure all surface mounted modules on the PWBA are securely connected.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. 3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
WARNING not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Perform the steps that follow:
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Advise the customer to check that the TCP/IP ports are correctly configured.
Perform the steps that follow:
2. Switch off the machine GP 4, then:
1. Initialise the hard disk, refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics.
a. Remove the EMMC card.
2. When the system has been recovered, advise the customer to set a correct HDD encryp-
b. Reinstall the EMMC card, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
tion key.
3. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected.
Make sure all surface mounted modules on the ESS PWBA are securely connected.
4. Reload the software, GP 9.
5. Perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
116-329 A system call error related to the serial I/F was detected.
116-338 Overall JBA fatal error. Due to an error in software processing, subsequent processes
cannot be performed.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected.
Make sure all surface mounted modules on the ESS PWBA are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the LONGDIAG MODE routine.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. 2. If the fault persists, install new main fan, PL 4.1 Item 13.
Make sure all surface mounted modules on the ESS PWBA are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
116-336 An error was detected when the HDD was accessed. Because data for initialization in ESS-ROM is written on ESS-NVRAM data when 116-334 is
detected, powering OFF then ON after that causes System Fails (124-315) that indicate mis-
116-337 Overall SNTP fatal error. Due to an error in software processing, subsequent pro- matches in various data between the three locations MCU PWBA, ESS PWBA SEEP Data
cesses cannot be performed. SYS1 and ESS PWBA NVM Data SYS2.
116-339 When the JBA is started up, the HDD is not installed. Procedure
Procedure
Perform the 016-210, 506, 777, 780, 798 HDD Error RAP. WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Check, then if necessary load the latest software, GP 9.
3. Check dC125. If a 124-315 fault has occurred perform the dC132 Machine ID/Billing Data
routine to synchronize the serial, product or billing data numbers.
4. Switch off the machine GP 4, then:
a. Remove the EMMC card.
b. Reinstall the EMMC card, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
5. Start the machine in special boot mode LONGDIAG MODE, GP 16.
6. Install new components as necessary:
• EMMC card PL 18.2 Item 37.
• ESS PWBA PL 18.2 Item 4.
7. If the problem persists, contact 2nd level support.
WARNING 116-394 Abnormal authentication mode and accounting mode settings detected during AAA
manager boot sequence.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Reload the software, GP 9.
116-346 A response such as system function recall error was detected. 116-349 An error occurred when calling the Pflite function using the SIF.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow: not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Perform the steps that follow:
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected.
Make sure all surface mounted modules on the ESS PWBA are securely connected. 1. Advise the customer to check that the TCP/IP ports are correctly configured.
3. Start the machine in special boot mode LONGDIAG MODE, GP 16. 2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
4. Reload the software, GP 9. 3. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected.
Make sure all surface mounted modules on the ESS PWBA are securely connected.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
4. Start the machine in special boot mode LONGDIAG MODE, GP 16.
5. Reload the software, GP 9.
6. Perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
116-354 The M/C was not started up due to a product code error detected in the HDD on boot- 116-363 BMLinkS/print service software failure.
ing.
116-367 Overall fatal error of Parallel.
116-356 The M/C was not started up due to an insufficient HDD capacity error detected during
HDD formatting. 116-370 Fatal error of XJCL.
116-361 Fatal error of SPL HDD. 116-373 Fatal error related to dynamic DNS.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the 016-210, 506, 777, 780, 798 HDD Error RAP.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check that the TCP/IP ports are correctly configured.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
3. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected.
Make sure all surface mounted modules on the ESS PWBA are securely connected.
4. Start the machine in special boot mode LONGDIAG MODE, GP 16.
5. Reload the software, GP 9.
6. Perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Enter dC131. Set NVM value 790-664 to 0. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Reload the software, GP 9. 2. Check dC125 Faults. If a new fault is listed, perform the relevant RAP.
3. If the fault persists, perform the 016-210, 506, 777, 780, 798 HDD Error RAP. 3. If the fault persists, perform the 016-210, 506, 777, 780, 798 HDD Error RAP.
WARNING
WARNING Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow: 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 2. If the fault persists, enter dC131. Make sure NVM values 700-165, 700-338 and 700-402
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016-210, 506, 777, 780, 798 HDD Error RAP. are correct. Change the values as necessary.
WARNING
WARNING Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow: 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 2. Enter dC131. Make sure the value of 720-061 is higher than 720-060. Adjust the values
2. Reload the software, GP 9. as necessary.
116-709 The MediaLib detected this error while performing the operation that requires access
to media.
116-716 The MediaLib detected this error while performing the operation that requires access
to media.
116-717 The MediaLib detected this error while performing the operation that requires access
to media.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the contents in the media for errors from the PC:
a. Check the file format/directory and selected mode (digital camera print/document
print).
b. Check whether the printed file attribute information is displayed.
c. Check whether the print file images are displayed.
d. Check whether the printed file attribute information is displayed.
e. If the fault persists, inform the customer that the media may be defective.
2. If the fault persists, inform the customer that the media may be defective.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Some of the parameters are disabled by XPIF so the device cannot execute them. Advise the
1. Reload the software, GP 9. customer to cancel the disabled parameter(s).
2. Perform the 016-210, 506, 777, 780, 798 HDD Error RAP.
3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
017-726 Color, single sided print attempted. Output changed to monochrome, duplex.
Procedure
Advise the customer to set the permissions and time zone as required.
017-741 The form data cannot be registered due to the restriction on the no. of forms. Procedure
Advise the customer to upgrade the driver.
017-742 The logo data cannot be registered due to the restriction on the no. of logos.
017-743 The received data (form/logo) exceeded the registered buffer size.
Procedure
Advise the customer to delete the unnecessary forms/logos. Otherwise, if not already installed,
inform the customer that the optional hard disk drive is required, PL 18.2 Item 91.
Procedure
Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to add the necessary font, or specify a substitute font. Advise the customer to set the banner sheet feed tray status to normal or change the banner
sheet feed tray.
116-780 The system detected an error in the document attached to the E-mail to XXX
Procedure
For information only. No service action necessary.
WARNING
WARNING Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. 1. Switch off the machine, GP 4.
Perform the steps that follow: 2. Remove the security enhancing kit from the incorrect slot.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 3. Install the security enhancing kit in the correct slot.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL 4. Switch on the machine, GP 4.
18.2 Item 24 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both
PWBAs are securely connected.
3. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the LONGDIAG MODE routine.
4. Reload the software, GP 9.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to install the correct CRUs for the changed geographic region and con- Perform the steps that follow:
tract type. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to wait for the machine to reboot.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off the machine, GP 4. Remove the memory card, ensure the contacts on the memory
card and socket are clean and undamaged. Ensure the write protection switch of the memory
card is unlocked. Switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Switch off the machine, GP 4. Rewrite the program and font data into the memory card. Switch
on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Switch off the machine, GP 4. Rewrite the program and font data into a new memory card.
Switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the LONGDIAG MODE routine. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
117-321 When starting, the installed EMMC card was detected to be unsupported by Sys- 117-326 When accessing the NVRAM data during start up or operation, a software malfunction
CheckMemory. occurs where the software parameters detected by the OSDD are mismatched.
117-322 When starting, memory encryption error was detected by SysCheckMemory. Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
117-323 When starting, EMMC card file system access error was detected by SysCheckMem-
ory.
117-324 When the OS is starting up, the system detected that the EMMC card is meant for
another product and an error is issued.
117-329 When starting up, the EMMC card was detected to be not connected by the OS or
SysCheckMemory.
117-338 Fault in the connection with EMMC card is detected by the controller.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Ensure the EMMC card, PL 18.2 Item 37 is securely installed.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
3. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL
18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBAs
are securely connected.
4. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the routines that follow:
• LONGDIAG MODE.
• 01. JOB LOG CLEAR MODE.
• HDD INITIALIZE MODE.
• 04. HDD FORMAT MODE.
5. Reload the software, GP 9.
6. If the fault persists, install a new components as necessary:
• EMMC card, PL 18.2 Item 37.
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Check if the PCI option is supported. 2. Check if the PCIEX option is supported.
3. Re-insert the PCI option. 3. Re-insert the PCIEX option.
If problem persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. If problem persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
WARNING
WARNING Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off the machine, GP 4. 1. Install a new hard disk, PL 18.2 Item 91.
2. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the HDD INITIALIZE MODE routine. 2. If the fault persists, perform the actions that follow:
a. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
b. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA,
PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on
both PWBAs are securely connected.
c. Reload the software, GP 9.
d. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 4, ensure that the control panel has turned off.
Perform the steps that follow:
2. Install the previously installed storage device (HDD or SSD).
1. Advise the customer to change the settings of the log transfer function:
3. Switch on the machine, GP 4.
• For detection condition 1, change the operation method for Log Auto Transfer to
anything other than Transfer in Job Units.
• For detection condition 2, check whether a hard disk is installed or change the Auto
Transfer function of the log to disable it.
2. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the LONGDIAG MODE routine.
3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. f the fault persists install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check if public print it is set to be stored as charge print.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. For a single occurrence, take no action.
2. If the fault persists, perform the steps that follow:
a. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
b. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA,
PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on
both PWBAs are securely connected.
c. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the LONGDIAG MODE routine.
d. Reload the software, GP 9.
e. Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
117-356 When obtaining the JobLimit estimation, a system error was detected in Procedure
ComlDvm_GetEstimation.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
117-358 A problem has occurred in software processing, and subsequent processes cannot be
performed, resulting in a fatal error related to the JAL. 2. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. If the fault persists, enter special boot mode, GP 16. Perform the LONGDIAG MODE rou-
tine.
Procedure 117-363 During the initial installation by USB dongle, it fails to set the count-up mode.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to set the correct time and date.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
2. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure the correct USB dongle is installed.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, 2 times if necessary. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. If the fault persists perform dC355 Initialize Hard Disk. 2. Check the connection of the wireless adaptor, PL 18.2 Item 90.
3. If the fault persists install a new wireless adaptor, PL 18.2 Item 90.
118-311 GCP related fatal error. The problem occurs at software processing, and processing is
unable to proceed.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL
18.2 Item 24 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both
PWBAs are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Procedure
WARNING When the IC card gate is connected and all the following settings have been made, the IC Card
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Link Mode is changed to Enter Password.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause • Set Login Setup / Auditron Administration > Login Setup / Auditron Mode to Remote
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Access.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Re-run the job. The fault persists. • Set Login Setup / Auditron Administration > Login Setup / Auditron Mode > Remote
Y N Access > IC Card Link Mode to No Password Required.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. • Select System Settings > Network Settings > Remote Authentication Server/Directory
Service > Authentication System and set to Kerberos or SMB.
Check the connection to the EP Accessory, Pull out and insert the EPSV Board. Disconnect
then reconnect the harness. Re-run the job. The fault persists. NOTE: When the IC card gate is connected the system automatically sets Login Setup /
Y N Auditron Administration > Login Setup / Auditron Mode > Remote Access > IC Card Link Mode
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. to Enter Password. If the customer does not want to use a password, make the appropriate
settings.
Check the version of the controller ROM. The controller ROM is the latest version.
Y N
Reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the actions that follow: Perform the actions that follow:
1. Without the EP-related products connected, start up the machine and set Login Setup / 1. Without the EP-related products connected, start up the machine and set Login Setup /
Auditron Administration > Login Setup / Auditron Mode to other than Remote Access. Auditron Administration > Login Setup / Auditron Mode to other than Remote Access.
2. Install the IC Card Remote Authentication Kit option and set the IC Card Gate of the EP- 2. Install the IC Card Remote Authentication Kit option.
related product to single connection.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the actions that follow:
1. Enter dC131. Set NVM value 850-021 to 0 (zero) to disable fax send charging or set NVM 1. Make the connection ICCR individual by USB and combine the authentication from IC
values 820-123 and 790-670 to 0 (zero). card and the panel. System Data: 700-909 is reset to 0 (zero) (disabled) from 1 (enabled)
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. in auto reboot.
2. Disconnect the EP related products and set to C/L 850-001 to 0 (zero).
3. Enable C/L: set 700-909 to 1.
4. If the problem persists, reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Re-run the job. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the connection to the EP accessory, Pull out and insert the EP-IF PWBA. Disconnect
then reconnect the harness. Re-run the job. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the version of the controller ROM. The controller ROM is the latest version.
Y N
Reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
WARNING death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Perform the steps that follow:
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
1. Make any accessories are installed correctly and are the correct specification.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Perform the steps that follow:
3. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL
1. Advise the customer to correct the unit price settings in the coin kit. Switch off, then switch
18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBAs
on the machine, GP 4. are securely connected.
2. If the fault persists: 4. Reload the software, GP 9.
a. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, 5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on
both PWBAs are securely connected.
b. Reload the software, GP 9.
c. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
123-325 The specified UI internal object could not be created due to a setting/specification 123-358 The control panel has detected that writing in the EEPROM for logging failed.
error. UI-SW failure in the ESS PWBA.
123-362 UI software failure in the ESS PWBA.
123-326 UI software failure in the ESS PWBA.
123-368 There is insufficient memory or the connection failed.
123-333 The hardware connection in the UI is faulty or the internal connection could not be 123-369 UI software failure in the ESS PWBA.
correctly detected.
123-371 The parameter sent from the controller was incorrect.
123-343 UI software failure in the ESS PWBA.
123-374 The job ID parameter sent from the controller was incorrect.
123-344 UI software failure in the ESS PWBA.
123-377 UI software failure in the ESS PWBA.
123-350 MCW panel one-touch key fail.
123-379 UI software failure in the ESS PWBA.
123-352 An error internal to the con-panel (an abnormal value in EEPROM for Sys) has been
detected. 123-380 UI software failure in the ESS PWBA.
123-353 The control panel has detected that the UI cable is disconnected. 123-381 UI software failure in the ESS PWBA.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Y N Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the wiring and connectors between the console assembly, PL 1.1A Item 4 or PL 1.1B Check the wiring and connectors between the console assembly, PL 1.1A Item 4 or PL 1.1B
Item 4 and the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. Check for loose connection, damage and contam-
Item 4 and the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. Check for loose connection, damage and contam-
ination. The wiring is good.
ination. The wiring is good.
Y N Y N
Repair the wiring or install new components as necessary:
Repair the wiring or install new components as necessary:
• (C400) Console assembly, PL 1.1A Item 4.
• (C400) Console assembly, PL 1.1A Item 4.
• (C405) Console assembly, PL 1.1B Item 4.
• (C405) Console assembly, PL 1.1B Item 4.
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Procedure Perform dC132. Make all three product numbers the same.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL
18.2 Item 4 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBAs
are securely connected.
3. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
4. Perform dC132. Make all three product numbers the same.
WARNING Procedure
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. WARNING
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Y N not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Enter dC132 Device ID and Billing Data. All three serial numbers are different.
Y N
Y N Perform SCP 4 Final Actions.
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Perform dC132. Make all three values (IOT, SYS 1 and SYS 2) the same. The fault persists.
Perform dC132. Make all three serial numbers the same. Y N
Perform SCP 4 Final Actions.
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists. Perform the steps that follow:
Y N 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
Enter dC132. Compare NVM values 700-606, 700-607 and 700-608. All three values are dif-
ferent. 3. Reload the software, GP 9.
Y N 4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
Enter dC132. Compare NVM values 700-603, 700-604 and 700-605. All three values are dif-
3. Ensure that the fax PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 7 is installed correctly. ferent.
4. Reload the software, GP 9. Y N
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to follow the instructions on the UI in order to enter the software key for
changing IOT speed.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Enter dC132 Device ID and Billing Data. All three serial numbers are different.
Y N
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 and ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 and the MCU PWBA, PL 2. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 are securely connected.
18.2 Item 24 are securely connected. Make sure all surface mounted modules on the Make sure all surface mounted modules MCU PWBA are securely connected.
ESS PWBA and MCU PWBA are securely connected. 3. Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. Perform dC132. Make all three product num-
3. Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. Perform dC132. Make all three product num- bers the same.
bers the same.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. Perform dC132. Make all
three product numbers the same.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Y N Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Enter dC132 Device ID and Billing Data. Make all three product numbers the same. The fault Enter dC132 Device ID and Billing Data. Make all three product numbers the same. The fault
persists. persists.
Y N Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Reinstall the EMMC card, PL 18.2 Item 37. The fault persists. Reinstall the EMMC card, PL 18.2 Item 37. The fault persists.
Y N Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new EMMC card, PL 18.2 Item 37. The fault persists. Install a new EMMC card, PL 18.2 Item 37. The fault persists.
Y N Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform the steps that follow: death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Y N
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 and the MCU PWBA, PL
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
18.2 Item 24 are securely connected. Make sure all surface mounted modules on the
ESS PWBA and MCU PWBA are securely connected.
Enter dC131. Compare NVM values 720-002 and 720-062. Both values are the same.
3. Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. Perform dC132. Make all three product num-
Y N
bers the same.
Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. Perform dC132. Make all
three product numbers the same. Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
WARNING
WARNING Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
Perform the steps that follow: Y N
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 and the MCU PWBA, PL
Enter dC131. Compare NVM values 720-052 and 720-063. Both values are the same.
18.2 Item 24 are securely connected. Make sure all surface mounted modules on the
Y N
ESS PWBA and MCU PWBA are securely connected.
Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
3. Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. Perform dC132. Make all three product num-
bers the same.
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. Perform dC132. Make all
three product numbers the same.
Procedure 124-354 The territory information that is stored in 3 locations are not initialized. Although the
values all match, they are the values for Not Set (zero).
WARNING Procedure
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. WARNING
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Y N not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
Enter dC131. Compare NVM values 720-057 and 720-064. Both values are the same. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Y N
2. Enter dC132 Device ID and Billing Data. Make all three product numbers the same.
Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
3. Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. 4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 are securely connected.
Make sure all surface mounted modules MCU PWBA are securely connected.
Enter dC132 Device ID and Billing Data. Make all three product numbers the same. The fault
3. Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. Perform dC132. Make all three product num-
persists.
bers the same.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Reinstall the EMMC card, PL 18.2 Item 37. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new EMMC card, PL 18.2 Item 37. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists. Perform the steps that follow:
Y N 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 and the MCU PWBA, PL
18.2 Item 24 are securely connected. Make sure all surface mounted modules on the
Enter dC132 Device ID and Billing Data. Make all three product numbers the same. The fault
ESS PWBA and MCU PWBA are securely connected.
persists.
3. Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. Perform dC132. Make all three product num-
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. bers the same.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. Perform dC132. Make all
Reinstall the EMMC card, PL 18.2 Item 37. The fault persists. three product numbers the same.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new EMMC card, PL 18.2 Item 37. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24 are securely connected.
Make sure all surface mounted modules MCU PWBA are securely connected.
Enter dC132 Device ID and Billing Data. Make all three product numbers the same. The fault
3. Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. Perform dC132. Make all three product num-
persists.
bers the same.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Reinstall the EMMC card, PL 18.2 Item 37. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new EMMC card, PL 18.2 Item 37. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
124-374 IOT The IOT controller software has detected a fatal error:
WARNING • Occurs when the system data obtained from within the controller during start up has an
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do incorrect value.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause • Occurs if diagnosics exit is carried out when SysUser NV initialization or IOT NV resulted
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. in exit.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. The fault persists. Procedure
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
WARNING
Enter dC132 Device ID and Billing Data. Make all three product numbers the same. The fault
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
persists.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Y N death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Perform the steps that follow:
Reinstall the EMMC card, PL 18.2 Item 37. The fault persists. 1. Switch off the machine, GP 4.
Y N 2. Start the machine in special boot mode LONGDIAG MODE, GP 16.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. 3. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4 are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
Install a new EMMC card, PL 18.2 Item 37. The fault persists.
4. Reload the software, GP 9.
Y N
5. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
• MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. • ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
6. If the fault persists after installing the new ESS PWBA, reinstall the original ESS PWBA.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary: 2. Enter dC132 Device ID and Billing Data. Make all three values the same.
• MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. 3. If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Perform dC132, use MCU PWBA as the master to resolve the fault. 1. Perform dC132, use SYS1 as the master to resolve the fault.
2. If the problem persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. 2. If the problem persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Enter dC132 Device ID and Billing Data. Make all three values the same.
3. If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Perform dC132, use SYS1 as the master to resolve the fault. 2. Perform dC132, use SYS1 as the master to resolve the fault.
3. If the problem persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. 3. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
• MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWBA a, PL 18.2 Item 24 and the ESS PWBA, PL
18.2 Item 24 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both
PWBAs are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 9.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Perform the 016A Workflow Scanning Error Entry RAP.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
133-221 The Fax card did not respond within the specified time on booting.
133-222 The Fax card did not respond within the specified time.
Procedure
Perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
133-282 As downloading of Fax card could not be completed due to either a Fax card failure or
Fax controller software failure, subsequent processes could not be performed.
133-283 Mailbox not open was detected when Fax report is stored in a mailbox.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to set the character that can be used by referring to the User Docu- 1. Advise the customer to load the correct the paper size and type for Fax printing or specify
mentation. If the customer does not know the type of letter that can be used, advise them the tray for Fax printing.
to use only alphanumeric characters. 2. If the fault persists, perform the steps that follow:
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP. a. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
b. Reload the software, GP 9.
Procedure
Load the required number and size of documents, then re-run the routine.
Procedure
Re-run the routine.
Procedure WARNING
Access the UI wiring, refer to, C400 REP 1.1 or C405 REP 1.4. Refer to (C405 WD 9) or (C400 Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot.
WD 10) and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the UI and the ESS PWBA (P/J135 Refer to GP 11 How to Check a Sensor:
and P/J1). The connections are good. Enter dC330 code 071-105 full stack sensor, PL 17.1 Item 11. The sensor operation fails.
Y N Y N
Reattach the connectors securely. Remove the exit assembly, PL 17.1 Item 1 to check the condition of the full stack sensor,
actuator, and harness. The sensor is connected and the harness undamaged.
Reload the system software, GP 9. The fault remains. Y N
Y N install a new full stack sensor or repair the harness. If the actuator is damaged,
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. install a new exit assembly.
Install new components as necessary: Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
• UI Harness assembly, PL 1.1A Item 1 C400, PL 1.1B Item 1 C405.
• UI Console assembly, PL 1.1A Item 4 C400) PL 1.1B Item 4 C405. Install new components in order until the error is corrected.
• ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. • Exit assembly, PL 17.1 Item 1.
• MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Use this procedure when referred by a Repair Analysis Procedure to troubleshoot possible
problems with the no paper sensor of the 550 option main feed assembly.
Procedure
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to GP 11 How to Check a Sensor:
Enter dC330 code 071-115, 550 option feeder no paper sensor, refer to sensor location. The
sensor operation fails.
Y N
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the no paper sensor and
550 option feeder PWBA (P/J4202 and P/J420). The connections are good.
Y N
Reattach the connectors securely.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the wires in the harness connecting
the option feeder path sensor and the 550 option feeder PWBA (P/J4202 and P/J420). The
continuity is good.
Y N
Install a new C2 size harness assembly, PL 10.1 Item 14.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check for approximately +3.3VDC between the 550 option
feeder PWBA ground and P/J420 pin 6. The voltage is incorrect.
Y N
Install a new option main feed assembly, PL 10.2 Item 1.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check for approximately +3.3VDC between the 550 option
feeder PWB ground and P/J419 pin 4. The voltage is incorrect.
Y N
Install a new 550 option feeder PWBA, PL 10.1 Item 10.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check for approximately +3.3VDC between the MCU
PWBA ground and P/J27 pin 7. The voltage is correct.
Y N
Refer to OF 20 +3.3VDC Power.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check the connections between the 550 option feeder
PWBA and the MCU PWBA (P/J419, DP/J271 and P/J27). The connections are good.
Y N
Reattach the connectors securely.
Procedure
When troubleshooting multi-feeds, use a new ream of paper. If a new ream can not be used,
WARNING
perform the following: Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
1. Fan the paper. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
2. Turn the paper round or turn the paper over. To check for the system power up error:
3. Remove four or five sheets from the top of the stack. 1. Switch off the machine, GP 4.
MSI Tray 2. If installed remove the optional hard disk drive PL 18.2 Item 91, and hard disk drive
bracket, PL 18.2 Item 13, Figure 1.
Perform the following:
3. Reconnect the hard disk drive, without the hard disk drive bracket, then switch on the
1. Ensure that the customer is not filling the tray above the max fill line.
machine, GP 4.
2. Clean the feed roller assembly with a water dampened cloth, PL 13.2 Item 98.
4. Check if the power on self test has completed successfully by ensuring that all 8 LEDs are
3. Check that the retard roller is clean, has torque resistance and does not rotate freely, PL lit when the device has completed start-up.
13.3 Item 14.
5. If the system power up sequence has failed, contact 2nd level support.
Tray 1
Check the following:
1. Check the tray side guides.
2. The bottom plate drops down when the tray is pulled out and elevates when pushed in.
a. Check the registration chute assembly components, PL 15.2.
b. Check the feed rolls, PL 9.1 Item 96.
c. Check that the retard friction clutch in the retard roll assembly has a torque resis-
tance and does not rotate freely, PL 9.1 Item 5.
3. Check the tray for worn, broken or missing components. If necessary install a new cas-
sette assembly, PL 9.1 Item 1.
Optional Tray
Check the following:
1. The bottom plate drops down when the tray is pulled out and elevates when closed.
a. Check the optional main feed assembly, PL 10.2 Item 1.
b. Check that the retard friction clutch in the retard roll Assembly has a torque resis-
tance and does not rotate freely, PL 10.3 Item 5.
2. Check tray for worn, broken or missing components. If necessary install a new cassette
assembly, PL 10.3 Item 1.
Procedure
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to GP 11 How to Check a Sensor:
Enter dC330 code 071-103, registration sensor, refer to sensor location. Touch Start. The
sensor operation fails.
Y N
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Refer to WD 11 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the registration sensor and
MCU PWBA (P/J232 and P/J23). The connections are good.
Y N
Reattach the connectors securely.
Check the continuity of the wires in the harness connecting the registration sensor and the
MCU PWBA. The continuity is good.
Y N
POST Diagnostic Install a new registration harness assembly, PL 15.2 Item 8.
LEDs
Refer to WD 11 and PJ Locations. Check for +5VDC between the MCU PWBA ground and P/
Figure 1 POST diagnostic LEDs J23 pin 6. The voltage is correct.
Y N
Perform the OF 19 +5VDC Power RAP.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION CAUTION
The +24VDC supply must be switched on before testing motors, solenoids and clutches (com- The +24VDC supply must be switched on before testing motors, solenoids and clutches (com-
ponent control code 041-001). To avoid damage to the machine, switch off the +24VDC supply ponent control code 041-001). To avoid damage to the machine, switch off the +24VDC supply
when testing is complete. when testing is complete.
Refer to GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch. Refer to GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
Enter dC330 code 071-008, tray one feed clutch, PL 15.2 Item 6. Touch Start. The clutch Enter dC330 code 071-010, registration clutch, PL 15.1 Item 8. Touch Start. The clutch oper-
operation fails. ation fails.
Y N Y N
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Refer to WD 11 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the tray 1 feed clutch and Refer to WD 11 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the registration clutch and
MCU PWBA (P/J392 and P/J39). The connections are good. MCU PWBA (P/J234 and P/J23). The connections are good.
Y N Y N
Reattach the connectors securely. Reattach the connectors securely.
Remove the tray 1 feed clutch, then check the wire-wound resistance between both terminals Remove the registration clutch, then check the wire-wound resistance between both terminals
for a value of 240 ohm (at 20 degrees C). The resistance measures correctly. for a value of 240 ohm (at 20 degrees C). The resistance measures correctly.
Y N Y N
Install a new tray 1 feed clutch, PL 15.2 Item 6. Install a new registration clutch, PL 15.1 Item 8.
Refer to WD 4, WD 11 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switches, then check for approxi- Refer to WD 4, WD 11 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switches, then check for approxi-
mately +24VDC between the MCU PWBA ground and P/J39 pin. The voltage is correct. mately +24VDC between the MCU PWBA ground and P/J23 pin 1. The voltage is correct.
Y N Y N
Perform the OF 18 +24VDC Power RAP. Perform the OF 18 +24VDC Power RAP.
Install a new tray 1 feed clutch, PL 15.2 Item 6. Install a new registration clutch, PL 15.1 Item 8.
Use this procedure when referred by a Repair Analysis Procedure to troubleshoot possible • Drawer 1 feeder harness, PL 10.1 Item 13.
problems with the feeder path sensor of the 550 option main feed assembly. • Main harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 2.
Procedure
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to GP 11 How to Check a Sensor:
NOTE: The option feeder path sensor is the paper path registration sensor for the 550 option
cassette assembly.
Enter dC330 code 071-117, option feeder 1 path (registration) sensor, refer to sensor location.
The sensor operation fails.
Y N
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the option feeder path sen-
sor and 550 option feeder PWBA (P/J4214 and P/J421). The connections are good.
Y N
Reattach the connectors securely.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the wires in the harness connecting
the option feeder path sensor and the 550 option feeder PWBA (P/J4214 and P/J421). The
continuity is good.
Y N
Install a new C2 size harness assembly, PL 10.1 Item 14.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check for approximately +3.3VDC between the 550 option
feeder PWBA ground and P/J421 pin 3. The voltage is incorrect.
Y N
Install a new option feeder path sensor, PL 10.2.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check for approximately +3.3VDC between the 550 option
feeder PWB ground and P/J419 pin 4. The voltage is incorrect.
Y N
Install a new 550 option feeder PWBA, PL 10.1 Item 10.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check for approximately +3.3VDC between the MCU
PWBA ground and P/J27 pin 7. The voltage is correct.
Y N
Perform the OF 20 +3.3VDC Power RAP.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check the connections between the 550 option feeder
PWBA and the MCU PWBA (P/J419, DP/J271 and P/J27). The connections are good.
Y N
Reattach the connectors securely.
A
Status Indicator RAPs February 2017 Launch Issue
OF 10 2-492 Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer
OF 11 550 Option Feed Clutch Assembly RAP Y N
Install a new 550 option feeder PWBA, PL 10.1 Item 10.
Use this procedure when referred by a Repair Analysis Procedure to troubleshoot possible
problems with 550 Option feed clutch assembly.
Refer to WD 4, WD 16 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switches, then check for approxi-
mately +24VDC between the MCU PWBA ground and P/J27 pin 4, then check for approxi-
Procedure mately +24VDC between the MCU PWBA ground and P/J27 pin 5. The voltages are correct.
Y N
Perform the OF 18 +24VDC Power RAP.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Check the connection between the 550 option feeder PWBA and the MCU PWBA (P/J419, DP/
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause J271, and P/J27). The connections are secure.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Y N
Reattach the connections securely.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the 550 option feed clutch
and 550 option feeder PWBA (P/J4213 and P/J421). The connections are good.
Y N
Reattach the connectors securely.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the wires in the harness connecting
the 550 option feed clutch and 550 option feeder PWBA (P/J4213 and P/J421). The continu-
ity is good.
Y N
Install a new C2 Size harness assembly, PL 10.1 Item 14.
Remove the 550 option feed clutch, then check the wire-wound resistance between both termi-
nals for a value of 240 ohm (at 20 degrees C). The resistance measures correctly.
Y N
Install a new 550 option feed clutch, PL 10.1 Item 8.
Refer to WD 4, WD 16 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switches, then check for approxi-
mately +24VDC between the 550 option feeder PWBA ground and P/J421 pin 1. The voltage
is incorrect.
Y N
Install a new option feeder clutch, PL 10.1 Item 8.
Refer to WD 4, WD 16 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switches, then check for approxi-
mately +24VDC between the 550 option feeder PWBA ground and P/J419 pin 6, then check for
approximately +24VDC between the 550 option feeder PWBA ground and P/J419 pin 7. The
voltage is incorrect.
Refer to WD 4, WD 16 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switches, then check for approxi-
WARNING mately +24VDC between the MCU PWBA ground and P/J27 pin 4, then check for approxi-
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- mately +24VDC between the MCU PWBA ground and P/J27 pin 5. The voltages are correct.
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause Y N
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Perform the OF 18 +24VDC Power RAP.
Check the connection between the 550 option feeder PWBA and the MCU PWBA (P/J419, DP/
CAUTION J271, and P/J27). The connections are secure.
The +24VDC supply must be switched on before testing motors, solenoids and clutches (com- Y N
ponent control code 041-001). To avoid damage to the machine, switch off the +24VDC supply Reattach the connections securely.
when testing is complete.
Refer to GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch. Install new components as necessary:
Enter dC330 code 071-022, 550 option registration clutch assembly, PL 10.2 Item 2. The • 550 option draw 1 feeder harness, PL 10.1 Item 13.
clutch operation fails. • Main harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 2.
Y N
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the 550 option registration
clutch assembly and 550 option feeder PWBA (P/J4201 and P/J420). The connections are
good.
Y N
Reattach the connectors securely.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the wires in the harness connecting
the 550 option registration clutch assembly and the 550 option feeder PWBA (P/J4201 and P/
J420). The continuity is good.
Y N
Install a new C2 turn harness assembly, PL 10.1 Item 15.
Remove the 550 option registration clutch assembly, then check the wire-wound resistance
between both terminals for a value of 240 ohm (at 20 degrees C). The resistance measures
correctly.
Y N
Install a new 550 option registration clutch assembly, PL 10.2 Item 2.
Refer to WD 4, WD 16 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switches, then check for approxi-
mately +24VDC between the 550 option feeder PWBA ground and P/J420 pin 1. The voltage
is incorrect.
Y N
Install a new 550 option registration clutch assembly, PL 10.2 Item 2.
A
Status Indicator RAPs February 2017 Launch Issue
OF 12 2-494 Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer
OF 13 550 Option Drive Assembly RAP Y N
Install a new 550 option feeder PWBA, PL 10.1 Item 10.
Use this procedure when referred by a Repair Analysis Procedure to troubleshoot possible
problems with the 550 option drive assembly.
Refer to WD 4, WD 16 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switches, then check for approxi-
mately +24VDC between the MCU PWBA ground and P/J27 pin 4, then check for approxi-
Procedure mately +24VDC between the MCU PWBA ground and P/J27 pin 5. The voltages are correct.
Y N
Perform the OF 18 +24VDC Power RAP.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Check the connection between the 550 option feeder PWBA and the MCU PWBA (P/J419, P/
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause J271, and P/J27). The connections are secure.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Y N
Reattach the connections securely.
Rotate the 550 option drive assembly manually. The drive assembly rotates easily without
an overload.
Y N
Reinstall the 550 Option drive assembly correctly, PL 10.1 Item 9.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the 550 option drive assem-
bly and 550 option feeder PWBA (P/J4221 and P/J422). The connections are good.
Y N
Reattach the connectors securely.
Refer to WD 16 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the wires in the harness connecting
the 550 option drive assembly and the 550 option feeder PWBA (P/J4221 and P/J422). The
continuity is good.
Y N
Install a new feeder motor harness assembly, PL 10.1 Item 16.
Refer to WD 4, WD 16 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switches, then check for approxi-
mately +24VDC between the 550 option feeder PWBA ground and P/J422 pin 6 The voltage
is incorrect.
Y N
Install a new 550 option drive assembly, PL 10.1 Item 9.
Refer to WD 4, WD 16 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switches, then check for approxi-
mately +24VDC between the 550 option feeder PWBA ground and P/J419 pin 6, then check for
approximately +24VDC between the 550 option feeder PWBA ground and P/J419 pin 7. The
voltage is incorrect.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to GP 11 How to Check a Sensor:
Enter dC330 code 071-104 exit sensor, PL 17.1 Item 11. The sensor operation fails.
CAUTION
Y N
The +24VDC supply must be switched on before testing motors, solenoids and clutches (com- Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
ponent control code 041-001). To avoid damage to the machine, switch off the +24VDC supply
when testing is complete. Refer to WD 15 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the exit sensor and MCU
Refer to GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch. PWBA (P/J155, P/J151, and P/J15). The connections are good.
Enter dC330 code 071-007 MSI Feed solenoid, PL 13.2 Item 9. The solenoid operation Y N
fails. Reattach the connectors securely.
Y N
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. Refer to WD 15 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the wires in the harness connecting
the exit sensor and the relay connector (P/J155 and P/J151). The continuity is good.
Refer to WD 7 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the MSI Feed solenoid and Y N
MCU Board (P/J214 and P/J21). The connections are good. Install a new exit sensor harness assembly, PL 17.1 Item 18.
Y N
Reattach the connectors securely. Refer to WD 15 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the wires in the harness connecting
the relay connector and the MCU PWBA (P/J151 and P/J15). The continuity is good.
Refer to WD 7 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the wires in the harness connecting Y N
the MSI Feed solenoid and the MCU PWBA (P/J214 and P/J21). The continuity is good. Install a new sensor harness assembly, PL 17.1 Item 23.
Y N
Install a new MSI Harness assembly, PL 13.2 Item 5. Refer to WD 15 and PJ Locations. Check if the voltage between the MCU PWBA ground and
PJ /15 pin 1 is approximately +5VDC. The voltage is correct.
Refer to WD 4, WD 7 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switches, then check if the voltage Y N
between the MCU PWBA ground and P/J21 pin 9 is approximately +24VDC. The voltage is Perform the OF 19 +5VDC Power RAP.
correct.
Y N Install a new exit sensor, PL 17.1 Item 11.
Perform the OF 18 +24VDC Power RAP.
Install a new MSI Feed solenoid assembly kit, PL 13.2 Item 99.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION CAUTION
The +24VDC supply must be switched on before testing motors, solenoids and clutches (com- The +24VDC supply must be switched on before testing motors, solenoids and clutches (com-
ponent control code 041-001). To avoid damage to the machine, switch off the +24VDC supply ponent control code 041-001). To avoid damage to the machine, switch off the +24VDC supply
when testing is complete. when testing is complete.
Refer to GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch. Refer to GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
NOTE: Exit clutch 1 is integral to the exit drive assembly, PL 17.1 Item 21. NOTE: Exit clutch 2 is integral to the exit drive assembly, PL 17.1 Item 21.
Enter dC330 code 071-011 exit clutch 1, PL 17.1 Item 21. The clutch operation fails. Enter dC330 code 071-012, exit clutch, PL 17.1 Item 21. The clutch operation fails.
Y N Y N
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Refer to WD 15 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between exit clutch 1 and MCU Refer to WD 15 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the exit clutch 2 and MCU
PWBA (P/J40). The connection is good. PWBA (P/J38). The connection is good.
Y N Y N
Reattach the connector securely. Reattach the connector securely.
Refer to WD 4, WD 15 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switches, then check if the volt- Refer to WD 4, WD 15 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switches, then check if the volt-
age between the MCU PWBA ground and P/J40 pin 1 is approximately +24VDC. The volt- age between the MCU PWBA ground and P/J38 pin 1 is approximately +24VDC. The volt-
age is correct. age is correct.
Y N Y N
Perform the OF 18 +24VDC Power RAP. Perform the OF 18 +24VDC Power RAP.
Install a new exit drive assembly, PL 17.1 Item 21. Install a new exit drive assembly, PL 17.1 Item 21.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to WD 4 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the LVPS and the MCU Refer to WD 4 and PJ Locations. Check the connection between the LVPS PWBA and the
PWBA (P/J501 and P/J29). The connections are good. MCU PWBA (P/J501 and P/J29). The connections are good.
Y N Y N
Reattach the connectors securely. Reattach the connectors securely.
Refer to WD 4 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the wires in the harness connecting Refer to WD 4 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the wires in the harness connecting
the LVPS and the MCU Board (P/J501 and P/J29). The continuity is good. the LVPS PWBA and the MCU PWBA (P/J501 and P/J29). The continuity is good.
Y N Y N
Install a new top harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 4. Install a new top harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 4.
Refer to WD 4 and PJ Locations. Close the interlock switches, then check if the voltage Refer to WD 4 and PJ Locations. Check if the voltage between the LVPS PWBA ground and P/
between the LVPS ground and P/J501 pin 2, and the voltage between the LVPS ground and P/ J501 pin 3 is approximately +5VDC. The voltage is incorrect.
J501 pin 1 is approximately +24VDC. The voltage is incorrect. Y N
Y N Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Switch the power off, wait a while, then switch the power on again. The fault persists.
Switch the power off, wait a while, then switch the power on again. The fault persists. Y N
Y N Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Refer to WD 4 and PJ Locations. Check if the voltage between the LVPS PWBA connectors P/
Refer to WD 4 and PJ Locations. Check if the voltage between the LVPS PWBA connectors P/ J48 pin 1 and P/J48 pin 3 is in the range of 110-127VAC ±10% or 220-240VAC ±10%. The
J48 pin 1 and P/J48 pin 3 is in the range of 110-127VAC ±10% or 220-240VAC ±10%. The voltage is correct.
voltage is correct. Y N
Y N Install a new AC inlet harness assembly, PL 18.1 Item 10.
Install a new AC inlet harness assembly, PL 18.1 Item 10.
Install a new LVPS PWBA, PL 18.1 Item 14.
Install a new LVPS PWBA, PL 18.1 Item 14.
Procedure
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Check the connection between the LVPS and the MCU Board (P/J501 and P/J29). The con-
nections are good.
Y N
Reattach the connectors securely.
Refer to WD 4 and PJ Locations. Check the continuity of the wires in the harness connecting
the LVPS PWBA and the MCU PWBA (P/J501 and P/J29). The continuity is good.
Y N
Install a new top harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 4.
Refer to WD 4 and PJ Locations. Check if the voltage between the LVPS PWBA ground and P/
J501 pin 5 is approximately +3.3VDC. The voltage is incorrect.
Y N
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24.
Switch the power off, wait a while, then switch the power on again. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Refer to WD 4 and PJ Locations. Check if the voltage between the LVPS PWBA connectors P/
J48 pin 1 and P/J48 pin 3 is in the range of 110-127VAC ±10% or 220-240VAC ±10%. The
voltage is correct.
Y N
Install a new AC inlet harness assembly, PL 18.1 Item 10.
Remove the transfer roller, PL 14.1 Item 2 then check for surface contamination or excessive
wear, ensure the transfer roller is correctly seated. The transfer roller is good.
Y N
Install a new transfer roller, PL 14.1 Item 2.
Perform the 094-310, 319, 325, 326 Error CTD Sensor Dirty RAP. The CTD sensor good.
Y N
Install a new color toner density (CTD) sensor, PL 6.1 Item 14.
Remove then examine the transfer belt assembly for surface contamination or excessive
wear. The transfer belt assembly is good.
Y N
Install a new transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1.
Print a test print. While the print is printing, turn off system power. Open the rear cover, then
check the image formed on the transfer belt. The image is poorly formed, faint and difficult
to read.
Y N
Install a new transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1.
Figure 1 Light or undertone print
Refer to WD 12 and PJ Locations. Check the transfer HVPS TR PWBA connector connection.
Initial Actions The transfer HVPS TR PWBA connector is connected correctly.
Y N
Connect the connector.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Install a new the transfer HVPS TR PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 30, then print a test print. The image
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause is too light.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
WARNING Refer to WD 12 and PJ Locations. Check P/J181 and P/J182 on the development HVPS XD
Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot. PWBA. The development HVPS XD PWBA connectors are connected correctly.
Y N
• Inspect the paper path for items, such as staples, paper clips, and paper scraps.
Connect the connector.
• Check the life counters of the imaging units. Replace the imaging units that are at end of
life, dC135 HFSI Counter. Install a new the development HVPS XD PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 25, then print a test print. The
• Check that the electrical contact points on the imaging units are clean. image is too light.
• Ensure that there are no obstructions in the laser light path. Y N
• Go to ADJ 6.3. Check, then adjust the bias voltage as necessary. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL PL 18.2 Item 24. The image is too light.
Procedure Y N
Check media condition, GP 26. Load new, dry recommended paper, then print a test print. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
The image is too light.
Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Install a new imaging unit of the affected color, PL 8.1, then print a test print. The image is
too light.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Remove the imaging unit of the affected color, clean the electrical contacts, then print a test
print. The image is too light.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Print a test print. While the print is printing, turn off system power. Remove the transfer belt,
then check the image formed on the belt, before image transfer. The image of the affected
color is well formed, clear, and easy to read.
Y N
Install a new transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1. The fault persists.
Figure 1 Undertone in one color Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Initial Actions
Install a new transfer HVPS TR PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 30, then print a test print. The
image is too light.
WARNING Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. The image is too light.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Replace the media with new, dry media from an unopened ream. The image smears.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the green fuser nip release levers. The levers are in the lowered (locked) position.
Y N
Push the levers down, cycle system power, and test. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
WARNING
Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot.
Remove and inspect the fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1. The fuser rollers are good.
Y N
Install a new fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1.
Figure 1 Unfused image Install a new fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1. The image smears.
Y N
Initial Actions Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Remove then examine the transfer belt assembly for surface contamination or excessive
WARNING wear. The transfer belt is clean, not worn, and works correctly.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Y N
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Install a new transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
If the fault persists contact 2nd level support.
WARNING
Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot. WARNING
• Check the environment. A location that is too cold or humid reduces fusing performance, Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot.
GP 26.
Remove and inspect the fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1. The fuser rollers are good.
• Inspect the media path for debris such as staples, paper clips, and paper scraps. Y N
• Verify that the media type is set correctly. Install a new fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1.
• Set media type setting to the next heavier type.
• Verify that the toner cartridge(s) of the affected color(s) is genuine Xerox toner. Check the fuser electrical connection. The connector is good.
Y N
• Adjust the fuser temperature setting for the loaded paper type, ADJ 7.1 Fuser Adjustment.
Repair or install a new harness.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot.
• Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications, GP 26.
• If using recycled paper, it may have spots.
• Inspect the paper path for items such as staples, paper clips, and paper scraps.
• Check Drum surface for spots or contamination.
• Check the Fuser for wear or contamination.
• Check that the Drum Cartridge contacts are clean.
Print 50% YMCKRGB test prints, dC612. The image contains spots in all colors. Refer to WD 9 and PJ Locations. Check the ROS video harness connections between the
Y N ROS assembly, PL 2.1 Item 1 and the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. The connections are
Install a new imaging unit of the affected color, PL 8.1, then print a test print. The fault secure.
persists with the affected color. Y N
Y N Secure the connections.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Perform the Procedure Xerographic Check.
Check if the spots are only on the back of a single-sided print. The back side is clear of
spots.
Y N
Remove the transfer roller, PL 14.1 Item 2, then check for surface contamination or
excessive wear. The transfer roller is good.
Y N
Install a new transfer roller, PL 14.1 Item 2.
WARNING
Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot.
Remove the fuser assembly, then check for damage or debris on the rollers. The fuser
rollers are good.
Y N
Install a new fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1.
Refer to WD 9 and PJ Locations. Check the ROS video harness connections between the
ROS assembly, PL 2.1 Item 1 and the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. The connections
are secure.
Y N
Secure the connections.
A
Image Quality February 2017 Launch Issue
IQ5 3-8 Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer
A
IQ6 Blank Print or Missing One Color Y N
Correct the settings or connections.
No visible image anywhere on the output, Figure 1.
Install a new ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4.
Check the test print is missing one or more colors. The print is totally blank (missing all col-
ors).
Y N
Remove the imaging unit of the affected color, then clean the electrical contacts; Reinstall
the imaging unit, then rerun the test print. The print is still missing the color.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new imaging unit for the affected color, PL 8.1 then rerun the test print. The
print is still missing the color.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
A
Launch Issue February 2017 Image Quality
Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer 3-9 IQ6
Y N IQ7 Vertical Process Streaks
Clear the laser light path of obstructions.
Extraneous vertical dark lines or bands, Figure 1.
Refer to WD 9 and PJ Locations. Check the ROS video harness connections between the
ROS assembly, PL 2.1 Item 1 and the ESS PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 4. The connections are
secure.
Y N
Secure the connections.
Install a new ROS assembly, PL 2.1 Item 1 then reprint the test print. The image is blank.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24. The image is blank.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot.
• Check that the paper supply is dry and meets specifications.
• Inspect the paper path for items such as staples, paper clips, and paper scraps.
• Check that the Drum Cartridge contacts are clean.
• Inspect the media path for contamination or obstruction.
Procedure
Check the error mode. The error occurs only when printing, and not when copying or
scanning.
Y N
Check the original. The original color is clean.
A
Image Quality February 2017 Launch Issue
IQ6, IQ7 3-10 Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer
A
Y N IQ8 Pitched Color Dots
Change the original.
Recurring color dots or spots, Figure 1.
Clean the scanner ADJ 50.1. The error persists when copying or scanning.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the amount of toner remaining in each cartridge; install new toner cartridges as
needed, PL 5.1. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the transfer belt for cleanliness, wear, and installation, PL 6.1 Item 1. The trans-
fer belt is clean, not worn, and works correctly.
Y N
Install a new transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1.
Check the amount of toner remaining in each cartridge; install new toner cartridges as needed,
PL 5.1. The fault persists.
Y N
Figure 1 Pitched color dots
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Procedure
Print, then analyze test pattern 61, dC612. The defective component is identified.
Y N
Install new imaging units, PL 8.1. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
A B
Launch Issue February 2017 Image Quality
Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer 3-11 IQ7, IQ8
A B
Install a new fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1. The fault persists. IQ9 Vertical Blanks (line, band, spots)
Y N
Use this procedure to correct defects that appear as areas of image blanks or deletions, Figure
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
1.
Install new components as necessary:
• Transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1.
• Transfer roller assembly, PL 14.1 Item 2.
• Retard holder assembly, PL 9.1 Item 3.
The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Refer to WD 12 and PJ Locations. Check P/J181 and P/J182 on the development HVPS
XD PWBA. The Development HVPS XD PWBA connectors are connected correctly.
Y N
Correctly connect the connectors.
Check the installation of the transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1. The transfer belt
assembly HV terminal is clean, and it contacts the spring correctly.
Y N
Clean the HV terminal. Reinstall the transfer belt assembly.
Check the transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1. The transfer belt assembly is clean,
undamaged, and works correctly.
Y N
Install a new transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1.
Figure 1 Vertical blanks
Refer to WD 12 and PJ Locations. Check the transfer HVPS TR PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 30
connector connection. The transfer HVPS TR PWBA connector is connected cor- Initial Actions
rectly.
Y N
Connect the connector. WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Print a test print. The image quality defect persists. not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Y N death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions
Check the media path for dirt, debris, or toner residue. The media path is clean.
Y N
Clean the media path.
If the vertical blank defect is in only one color, install a new imaging unit of the missing color
type, PL 8.1 then reprint the test print. The image contains spots.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Remove then examine the transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1 for surface contamination or
excessive wear. The transfer belt assembly is good.
Y N
Install a new transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1.
Check for debris on the ROS assembly window or obstructions between the ROS assembly
and imaging unit. The laser light path is clear.
Y N
Perform ADJ 2.1 Laser Lens Cleaning.
Figure 1 Ghosting
Remove the transfer belt assembly, then check for surface contamination or excessive
wear. The transfer belt surface is good.
Y N
Install a new transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1.
Check the HV terminal on the transfer belt assembly is clean and makes good contact to
the spring. The HV terminal is clean and makes contact correctly.
Y N
Install a new transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1.
Figure 2 Ghosting Type
Refer to WD 12 and PJ Locations. Check the transfer HVPS TR PWBA connector con-
nection. The transfer HVPS TR PWBA connector is connected correctly.
Y N
Correctly connect the connector.
A
Image Quality February 2017 Launch Issue
IQ10 3-14 Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer
IQ11 Light Induced Fatigue IQ12 Fog, Background Contamination
Light fatigue pattern appearing across image, Figure 1. There is toner contamination on all or part of the page, Figure 1. The contamination appears as
a very light single or multi-color dusting or fog.
Initial Actions
Figure 1 Background defect
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Initial Actions
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
WARNING not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications, GP 26.
• Inspect the paper path for items such as staples, paper clips, and paper scraps.
WARNING
• Check CRU life counts. Replace components at end of life.
Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot.
Procedure • Check media type settings are correct.
Check, then if necessary adjust the transfer bias voltage, ADJ 6.3. The image quality defect • Some glossy media or photo paper will exhibit high background. If the issue only occurs
persist. on a particular media, try a different brand.
Y N • Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications, GP 26.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. • Verify the toner cartridges, PL 5.1 are Xerox manufactured components with adequate life
remaining. If non-Xerox toner cartridges are being used, this could be the problem.
Install new imaging units, PL 8.1. The image quality defect persist.
• Clean the imaging unit, PL 8.1 contacts.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. • Ensure all covers are in place and no outside light enters the device.
Install a new imaging unit, PL 8.1 of the affected color, then print a test print. The image
includes background defects.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Perform the 094-310, 319, 325, 326 Error CTD Sensor Dirty RAP, then print a test print. The
image includes background defects.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Refer to WD 12 and PJ Locations. Check the transfer HVPS TR PWBA connector connection.
The transfer HVPS TR PWBA connector is connected correctly.
Y N
Correctly connect the connector.
Install a new the transfer HVPS TR PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 30, then print a test print. The image
includes background defects.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Refer to WD 12 and PJ Locations. Check P/J181 and P/J182 on the development HVPS XD
PWBA. The development HVPS XD PWBA connectors are connected correctly.
Y N
Correctly connect the connector.
Install a new the development HVPS XD PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 25 then print a test print. The
image includes background defects.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Remove, then examine the transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1 for surface contamination or
excessive wear. The transfer belt assembly is good.
Y N
Install a new transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1.
Install a new transfer HVPS TR PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 30 then print a test print. The image
includes background defects.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
install a new MCU PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 24, then print a test print. The image includes back-
ground defects.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
A
Image Quality February 2017 Launch Issue
IQ12 3-16 Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer
A B
IQ13 Bead-Carry-Out (BCO) Install new imaging units, PL 8.1. The fault persists.
Y N
Multiple dots appearing across image, Figure 1.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Refer to WD 12 and PJ Locations. Check the transfer HVPS TR PWBA connector con-
nection. The connection is secure.
Y N
Secure the connection.
Install a new transfer HVPS TR PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 30 then print a test print. The fault
persists
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Refer to WD 12 and PJ Locations. Check P/J181 and P/J182 on the development HVPS
XD PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 25. The Development HVPS XD PWBA connectors are con-
nected correctly.
Y N
Correctly connect P/J181 and P/J182.
WARNING Install a new transfer HVPS TR PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 30 then print a test print. The fault per-
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do sists
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Y N
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Refer to WD 12 and PJ Locations. Check P/J181 and P/J182 on the development HVPS XD
WARNING PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 25. The Development HVPS XD PWBA connectors are connected
Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot. correctly.
Y N
• Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications, GP 26.
Correctly connect P/J181 and P/J182.
• Inspect the paper path for items such as staples, paper clips, and paper scraps.
• Check CRU life counts. Replace components at end of life. Install a new development HVPS XD PWBA, PL 18.2 Item 25.
Procedure
Check altitude of printer installation location, ADJ 1.1. The printer is within specified alti-
tude limits.
Y N
Relocate printer to within specified altitude limits. The image quality defect persists
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
A B
Launch Issue February 2017 Image Quality
Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer 3-17 IQ13
IQ14 Jagged Characters Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Text in image is fuzzy or blurry, Figure 1.
Enable Print Page Mode. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
If using a downloaded font, ensure that the font is recommended for the printer, operating sys-
tem, and the application being used. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot.
• Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications, GP 26.
• Inspect the paper path for items such as staples, paper clips, and paper scraps.
• Check CRU life counts. Replace components at end of life.
Procedure
Set Screen to Fineness. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Remove the transfer belt assembly, then check for surface contamination or excessive
wear. The transfer belt assembly is good.
Y N
Install a new transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1.
Remove the transfer roller, PL 14.1 Item 2 then check for surface contamination or exces-
sive wear. The transfer roller is good.
Y N
Install a new transfer roller, PL 14.1 Item 2.
WARNING
Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot.
install a new fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Figure 1 Horizontal bands Install a new retard holder assembly, PL 9.1 Item 3. The fault persists.
Y N
Initial Actions Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
WARNING
Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot.
• Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications GP 26.
• Inspect the paper path for items such as staples, paper clips, and paper scraps.
• Check CRU life counts. Replace components at end of life.
Procedure
Perform ADJ 6.1, Color Toner Density Sensors Cleaning, then print a test print. The image
quality defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
A
Launch Issue February 2017 Image Quality
Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer 3-19 IQ15
IQ16 Auger Mark IQ17 Wrinkled/Stained Paper
Auger marks appear across output, Figure 1. The page comes out of the output tray either wrinkled, creased, stained, or torn, Figure 1.
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING WARNING
Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot. Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot.
• Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications GP 26. • Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications, GP 26.
• Inspect the paper path for items such as staples, paper clips, and paper scraps. • Inspect the paper path for items such as staples, paper clips, and paper scraps.
• Check CRU life counts. Replace components at end of life. • Check CRU life counts. Replace components at end of life.
Procedure Procedure
Install new imaging units, PL 8.1. The fault persists. Verify that correct print media is being used and replace media if needed. The fault persists.
Y N Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
If the fault persists contact 2nd level support. Check if problem occurs on paper sheets or on envelopes. Problem occurs on paper
sheets.
Check the paper humidity conditioning effect by loading recommended paper from an
unopened pack or one that has been sealed and stored under humidity control. Perform a test
print. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the paper type setting. The paper type setting corresponds with the paper in the
cassette.
Y N
Set the correct paper type.
Check the paper transfer path between the paper entrance and the paper exit is clear of any
smears or foreign substances. The paper transport path is clean.
Y N
Remove the foreign substances.
Check the retard roller assembly, PL 9.1 Item 4. The retard roller is good.
Y N
Install a new retard roller assembly, PL 9.1 Item 4.
Check the installation status of the transfer roller assembly, PL 14.1 Item 2. The transfer
roller assembly is installed correctly.
Y N
Reinstall transfer roller assembly.
A
Launch Issue February 2017 Image Quality
Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer 3-21 IQ17
A B
IQ18 Leading Edge Paper Damage Insert a different sheet of paper in the MSI tray, then try again. The fault persists.
Y N
The page comes out of the output tray with the leading edge damaged, Figure 1.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Use another tray in place of the MSI tray. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the paper humidity conditioning effect by loading recommended paper from an
unopened pack or one that has been sealed and stored under humidity control. Perform a test
print. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Figure 1 Leading edge damage Check the paper type setting. The paper type setting corresponds with the paper in the
cassette.
Initial Actions Y N
Set the correct paper type.
WARNING Check the paper transfer path between the paper entrance and the paper exit is clear of any
smears or foreign substances. The paper transport path is clean.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Y N
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Remove the foreign substances.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Check the retard roller assembly, PL 9.1 Item 4. The retard roller is good.
Y N
WARNING Install a new retard roller assembly, PL 9.1 Item 4.
Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot.
• Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications. Check the installation status of the transfer roller assembly, PL 14.1 Item 2. The transfer
• Inspect the paper path for items such as staples, paper clips, and paper scraps. roller assembly is installed correctly.
Y N
• Check CRU life counts. Replace components at end of life.
Reinstall transfer roller assembly.
Procedure
Check if damage occurs when using the MSI tray or with other trays. The problem does not
occur when using the MSI Tray. WARNING
Y N Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
Reverse the paper in the MSI tray, then try again. The fault persists. Check the installation of the fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1. The fuser assembly is installed
Y N correctly.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
A B
Image Quality February 2017 Launch Issue
IQ18 3-22 Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer
Y N IQ19 Incorrect Top and Side Margins
Reinstall the fuser assembly.
Image prints outside of the page margins, Figure 1.
Check the fuser assembly.
Remove the fuser assembly, turn the gear by hand, and examine the heat roll section for Initial Actions
debris and damage. The heat roll section is good.
Y N
Install a new fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: ADJ 5.3 Image position has separate adjustments for side 1 and side 2.
• Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications, GP 26.
• Inspect the paper path for items such as staples, paper clips, and paper scraps.
• Check CRU life counts. Replace components at end of life.
Procedure
Ensure the margins are set correctly in the application being used. The position of the
printed image is incorrect.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the error mode. The fault only occurs during printing.
Check the DADF guides, if necessary adjust the guides. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the DADF Feed Roller, PL 50.1 Item 1. The Feed Roller is damaged or contam-
inated.
Y N
Install a new DADF assembly, PL 50.1 Item 1.
Clean the DADF feed roller, PL 50.1 Item 5. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new DADF Feed roll kit, PL 50.1 Item 99. The fault persists.
Y N
Figure 1 Color reg misalignment
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the printing in diagnostics: dC612, test pattern 65. The fault persists.
Y N WARNING
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform ADJ 5.3 Image Position. The fault persists. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Y N
NOTE: The terms xerographic development assembly and imaging unit are used throughout
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
this document interchangeably.
Install a new transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1. The fault persists. • Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications, GP 26.
Y N • Inspect the paper path for items such as staples, paper clips, and paper scraps.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
• Check CRU life counts. Replace components at end of life.
Refer to WD 8 and PJ Locations. Check the wiring between the ROS assembly and the MCU
PWBA. P/J36 and P/J 11 are connected correctly. Procedure
Y N Adjust the settings of the paper type on the printer driver to those of the tray. The fault per-
Secure the connections. sists.
Y N
Install a new ROS assembly, PL 2.1 Item 1. The fault persists. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. Perform the auto color registration adjustment described in ADJ 5.1. The fault persists.
Install a new transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1 Item 1. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Procedure
Adjust the paper guides correctly. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Ensure the transfer belt assembly is installed correctly, PL 6.1 Item 1. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
A
Launch Issue February 2017 Image Quality
Xerox® VersaLink® C400 Color Printer and C405 Color Multifunction Printer 3-25 IQ20, IQ21
A
Check the paper humidity conditioning effect by loading recommended paper from a unopened IQ22 Repeating Defects Procedure
package or one that has been sealed and stored under humidity control. Perform a test print.
The fault persists. Purpose
Y N This is an image quality hardware defects detection procedure. Perform this procedure to iden-
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. tify if one of the following assemblies, xerographic development assembly PL 8.1, fuser
assembly PL 7.1, transfer belt assembly PL 6.1 or transfer roller assembly PL 14.1, are the
Check the paper type setting. The paper type setting corresponds with the paper printed. cause of horizontal streaks or spots that appear in a constant cycle on defective output prints
Y N and copies.
Set the correct paper type.
Procedure
Check the paper transfer path. There is no dirt or foreign substances on the paper trans-
1. At the device user interface, enter service mode, GP 1.
fer path between the paper entrance and the paper exit.
2. Touch Device.
Y N
Remove the foreign substance. 3. Touch Support.
4. Touch Support Pages.
Check the paper path TA1 and TA2 roller assemblies, PL 13.1. The roller assemblies are 5. Touch Repeating Defects.
not dirty, damaged, or worn and they function correctly.
6. The device will print a Repeating Defects check print and a Cyan, Magenta, Green and
Y N
Grey test print.
Clean or install a new TA1 or TA2 roller assembly, PL 13.1.
7. Refer to the instructions on the Repeating Defects check print.
Check the installation status of the transfer roller assembly, PL 14.1 Item 2. The transfer 8. Check if any horizontal streaks or spots on the 4 colored test prints match with any of the
roller is installed correctly. corresponding measurement marks on the Repeating Defects check print.
Y N
NOTE: The repeating defect must be measured accurately to ensure the correct assem-
Reinstall the transfer roller.
bly is identified.
NOTE: The term Drum Cartridge is used on the Repeating Defects check print to
describe the xerographic development assembly.
WARNING
9. Install new components as necessary:
Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot.
• Xerographic development assembly, PL 8.1.
Check the installation status of the fuser assembly PL 7.1. The fuser assembly is installed
correctly. • Fuser assembly, PL 7.1.
Y N • Transfer belt assembly, PL 6.1.
Reinstall the fuser assembly. • Transfer roller assembly, PL 14.1.
REPs 19 - Covers
REP 19.1 Front Cover Assembly C400........................................................................... 4-101
REP 19.2 Top Cover Assembly C400 ............................................................................. 4-101
REP 19.3 Exit Cover C400.............................................................................................. 4-104
REP 19.4 Top Right Cover C400 .................................................................................... 4-104
REP 19.5 Right Side Cover Assembly C400 .................................................................. 4-105
REP 19.6 Front Cover Assembly C405........................................................................... 4-106
REP 19.7 Top Cover Assembly C405 ............................................................................. 4-106
REP 19.8 Exit Cover C405.............................................................................................. 4-108
REP 19.9 Upper Right Cover C405 ................................................................................ 4-109
REP 19.10 Inner Upper Right Cover C405 ..................................................................... 4-110
REP 19.11 Right Side Cover Assembly C405 ................................................................ 4-110
REP 19.12 Top Left Cover C400 .................................................................................... 4-111
REP 19.13 Rear Cover Assembly C400 ......................................................................... 4-112
REP 19.14 Left Side Cover Assembly C400 ................................................................... 4-112
REP 19.15 IIT Left Outer Base C405 .............................................................................. 4-113
REP 19.16 Rear Cover Assembly C405 ......................................................................... 4-114
REP 19.17 Left Rear Lower Cover C405 ........................................................................ 4-114
REP 19.18 Left Side Cover Assembly C405 ................................................................... 4-115
REPs 50 - IIT
REP 50.1 IIT and DADF Assemblies .............................................................................. 4-117
REP 50.2 Counter balance Assemblies .......................................................................... 4-118
REP 50.3 DADF Input Tray Assembly ............................................................................ 4-118
REP 50.4 Scanner Assembly.......................................................................................... 4-119
REP 50.5 DADF Actuator................................................................................................ 4-120
REP 50.6 DADF Feed Roll Kit ........................................................................................ 4-120
ADJs 1 Altitude
ADJ 1.1 Altitude Setting Adjustment ............................................................................... 4-123
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- 4
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause Remove the
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury 2 UI harness.
Release the UI harness
1. Remove the UI bottom left cover C400, REP 1.5. from the harness guide.
2. Remove the left side cover assembly C400, REP 19.14.
3. Remove the ESS top plate, Figure 1.
3
Release the cable tie.
P/J1
Front
1
Rear Disconnect P/J1352.
1 Figure 2 UI harness assembly C400
Remove 7 screws.
2 Replacement
Remove the ESS top plate. 1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Refer to GP 8 before the
screws are installed
WARNING
UI access door
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- 5
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause Remove the user interface
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury console.
1. Remove the user interface top cover, Figure 1.
Front 1
Remove the UI access door in
the direction of the arrow.
1
Remove the screw, then
remove the user interface 2
top cover. Disconnect P/J1 of the
UI harness.
Front
3
Disconnect P/J4 of the
speaker harness.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Refer to GP 8 before the
screws are installed
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. 1
1. Remove the IIT front cover, Figure 1. Slide the ICCR top cover
off the UI base in the
direction of the arrow.
2 Front
Remove the IIT front
cover in the direction
of the arrow.
2
Remove the screw and the UI base top cover.
Front
1
Release the hook
Front
Figure 1 ESD Symbol
3
Disconnect the
UI harness.
CAUTION
1 2 Ensure that E.S.D. procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the user
Remove the UI access door in Disconnect the interface assembly.
the direction of the arrow. speaker harness.
1. Remove the left side cover assembly C405, REP 19.18.
Figure 3 User interface console C405 2. Remove the user interface console C405, REP 1.3.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
1
Release the harness
clamp.
2
Release the 2 harness
clamps.
3
Remove the UI harness.
Front
4
Remove 2 screws, then remove
the USB harness assembly ICCR.
1 2
Disconnect P/J632 of the USB harness Disconnect P/J1352 of the UI harness, then
Front
assembly ICCR, then release the harness release the harness from the harness guide.
from the harness guide.
Figure 2 Disconnect the UI and USB/ICCR harnesses Figure 3 Remove the UI and USB-ICCR harnesses
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Refer to GP 8 before the
screws are installed
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury
1. Remove the user interface console C400, REP 1.2. 1. Remove the user interface bottom left cover C400, REP 1.5.
2. Open the front cover assembly, PL 19.1A Item 1. 2. Remove the UI bottom right cover C400, Figure 1.
3. Remove the UI bottom left cover C400, Figure 1.
2
3 Remove 2 screws.
Remove the UI
bottom right
cover C400.
2
Release the 2
bosses.
3 1
Remove the UI Open the top cover
bottom left cover in assembly.
the direction of the
arrow.
Front
Front 1
Remove 2 screws.
Figure 1 UI bottom right cover
Figure 1 UI bottom left cover
Replacement
Replacement 1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Refer to GP 8 before the
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Refer to GP 8 before the screws are installed
screws are installed
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Avoid exposure to laser beam. Invisible laser radiation.
4
WARNING Remove 2
screws.
Follow the service procedure exactly as written. Use of controls or adjustments other
than those specified in this manual, may result in an exposure to invisible laser radia-
tion. During servicing, the invisible laser radiation can cause eye damage if looked at
directly. 5
Remove the ROS assembly,
simultaneously guide the ROS
harness through the hole in 2
the device frame. Remove 1 screw and
the base duct.
3
Release the harness
from the clamp.
Figure 1 Laser beam symbol
1. Remove the front cover assembly, (C400 REP 19.1), (C405 REP 19.6).
2. Remove the UI bottom right cover, (C400 REP 1.6).
3. Remove the waste box assembly, PL 8.1 Item 7.
CAUTION
Ensure the xerographic development assemblies are stored in a dark location. The xero-
graphic development assemblies can be damaged by exposure to light. Figure 2 Remove the ROS assembly
4. Remove the dispenser assemblies Y, M, C and K, REP 5.3.
5. Remove the ESS PWBA and EMMC Card, (C400 REP 18.4), (C405 REP 18.5).
6. Remove the ROS assembly, Figure 2.
ROS assembly
Left guide
Right guide
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Take care during this procedure. Sharp edges may be present that can cause injury.
CAUTION
Ensure the main drive assembly is kept facing upwards during the removal procedure to avoid
the gears falling off the assembly.
1. Remove the Development HVPS XD PWBA, REP 18.10.
2. Remove the ESS PWBA, (C400 REP 18.4), (C405 REP 18.5).
2 Rear
Remove the ESS 1
rear plate. Remove 6 screws.
2
Rear Remove 5 screws and
2 the ESS Front plate.
Rear
Remove 3 screws and 1
1 the ESS Front plate. Remove 5 screws and the
Remove 4 screws and the ESS Bottom plate.
ESS Bottom plate. Figure 3 ESS bottom and front plates C405
Figure 2 ESS bottom and front plates C400
2
Release the harnesses
2
from the left harness Release the harnesses
guide. from the video harness
guide.
Left harness
guide
1
Remove 1
screw and
the HVPS Rear
earth plate. 3 1
Rear Remove the video harness Remove 4
guide. screws.
4
Release the left guide fixing pawl, then 3
remove the left harness guide. Remove 2 screws.
7. Refer to Figure 6. Disconnect P/J171, P/J311, P/J172, P/J312, P/J331 and P/J213 from
the main drive assembly.
8. Remove the left top under cover, refer to REP 19.2.
Top cover
link 2
Coupling
link
2
1 Disconnect top cover link 2
Raise the top cover assembly. from the coupling Link.
P/J171
P/J311
Coupling link
NOTE: It may be necessary to raise
the coupling link from inside the
P/J213
printer.
P/J331
Figure 7 Position the coupling link
5. Do not fully tighten any of the screws fixing the ESS PWBA, ESS bottom plate and ESS
rear plate, until all the screws for fixing these components are in position.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot. Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the right side cover assembly, (C400 REP 19.5), (C405 REP 19.11). 1. Remove the main drive assembly, REP 3.1.
2. Remove the waste drive assembly, Figure 1. 2. Remove the duplex chute assembly, REP 15.5.
1
Release the harness from the
clamp.
2
Front Remove the waste drive
assembly, 3 screws.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
3
Release the hook of waste
gear 3, then remove the gear.
2
Remove the screw and the
LV AC harness guide.
1
Release the harness from the
LV AC harness guide.
7
Unlock, rotate then
remove waste
bearing 2.
Rear
6 5 4
Remove the drive shaft Unlock, rotate then Release the hook of waste gear
through the hole in the remove waste bearing 1. 2, then remove the gear.
frame.
Figure 1 Remove the drive shaft assembly
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the right side cover assembly, (C400 REP 19.5), (C405 REP 19.11). 1. Remove the waste box, PL 8.1 Item 7.
2. Disconnect P/J503 from the LVPS PWBA, PL 18.1 Item 14. 2. Remove the waste toner box full sensor, Figure 1.
3. Remove the main fan, Figure 1.
Front
Front
3
Remove the main fan.
1 2
Label
Release the harness from
Disconnect P/J203.
the clamp.
3
1 Release the 4 clips holding the waste toner
Release the 4 clips holding the waste box full sensor, then remove the sensor.
2 sensor cover, then remove the cover.
Remove the screw. Figure 1 Remove the toner full sensor
Figure 1 Remove the main fan
Replacement
Replacement Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
1. On installation ensure the main fan is orientated with the label side of the fan facing
inwards, refer to Figure 1.
2. Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Latch spring
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- 2
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause Remove the left rear latch bracket and
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. the latch spring from the left latch.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the fuser assembly, REP 7.1.
2. Remove the right side cover assembly, (C400 REP 19.5), (C405 REP 19.11).
3. Remove the left side cover assembly, (C400 REP 19.14), (C405 REP 19.18). 1
4. Remove the left and right rear latches, Figure 1. Remove the 2
screws, then
remove the left
latch bracket.
Rear
3
Remove the right rear latch and
the latch spring.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
3
Remove the 5 screws
and the MCU plate.
1
Disconnect the front door inter-
lock photo sensor, P/J145.
2 4
Remove 1 screw and Remove 4 screws and the outer
the HVPS Earth plate. developer charge housing assem-
bly.
Harness clamp
MCU plate
Front
Front
1
NOTE: The upper dispenser motor Ensure that the tips of the 6 contact
assembly has been removed from this springs (indicated by the arrows) are
2 illustration for clarity. correctly positioned.
Remove the 4 screws, then remove the
upper dispenser motor assembly.
Figure 4 Contact springs
WARNING 1
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Disconnect the front door inter-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause lock photo sensor, P/J145.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: To remove only the Y, M Dispenser Motor, perform steps 1, 3 and 5. Harness clamp P/J145
Harness clamp
MCU plate
Front
1
Disconnect P/J251 on the Front
Front
EEPROM XPRO PWBA.
1
Disconnect P/J141
3 and P/J145.
Release the harness from
the outer developer
charge housing assem-
bly.
P/J251
2
2 4 Remove 1 screw.
Remove 1 screw and Remove 4 screws and the outer 3
the HVPS Earth plate. developer charge housing assem- Rotate the dispenser motors
bly. counterclockwise to remove.
Figure 2 Outer developer charge housing Figure 3 Upper dispenser motor assembly
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
Ensure the xerographic development assemblies are stored in a dark location. The xero-
graphic development assemblies can be damaged by exposure to light.
2. Remove the Y, M, C and K, xerographic development assemblies, PL 8.1.
3. Remove the upper dispenser motor assembly, REP 5.1.
4. Remove the main drive assembly, REP 3.1.
5. Remove the bypass tray frame assembly, REP 13.3.
Front
1
NOTE: The upper dispenser motor Ensure that the tips of the six contact
assembly has been removed from this springs (indicated by the arrows) are
illustration for clarity. correctly positioned.
4 5
Pull the dispenser assembly K towards the front while Pull the dispenser assemblies to the front in the order C, M and Y
pressing the lug on the left side inward with a screwdriver. while pressing the lug on the left side inward with a screwdriver.
1
Remove the frame
duct, 2 screws.
2
Front Remove 1 screw.
3
Remove 2 screws. 4
1 Front Remove 3 screws from
Disconnect the CRUM each dispenser assembly.
board connector on the
bottom of dispenser
assembly K. 2
Disconnect the CRUM board
connector on the bottom of the
dispenser assemblies in the
following order, C, M and Y.
NOTE: The rear hook placement can not be seen when the main drive assembly is installed.
Visually check that the rear hook is in the correct position by looking into the area behind the
hook where the imaging units are installed. Rear hook
3. Before securing the dispenser assemblies, ensure that the front lug and the rear hook for
each dispenser assembly is in the correct position, Figure 3.
Front lug
Front
4. Verify the alignment of each dispenser assembly by test fitting each xerographic develop-
ment assembly, before securing the dispenser assemblies in position.
5. Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the upper transfer belt chute assembly, REP 15.2.
CAUTION
Ensure the xerographic development assemblies are stored in a dark location. The xero-
graphic development assemblies can be damaged by exposure to light.
2. Remove the xerographic development assemblies Y, M, C and K, PL 8.1.
Front
2
Remove 4 screws and the left transfer
belt guide assembly.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Springs NOTE: Take care not to drop and lose the CTD Springs.
Parts List on PL 6.1
Removal
1
Remove the CTD spring from the left
transfer belt guide assembly.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the fuser assembly, REP 7.1.
2. Remove the upper transfer belt chute assembly, REP 15.2.
3. Remove the color toner density (CTD) right guide, PL 6.1 Item 12.
2
Remove the CTD spring from the
frame.
4 CAUTION
Remove the 2
CTD springs. Do not touch or place any object on the surface of the transfer belt.Contamination may cause
print quality problems.
CAUTION
Ensure the transfer belt assembly is placed on a flat surface free of foreign substances and
Front covered with a protective sheet. Contamination may cause print quality problems.
5. Remove the transfer belt assembly, Figure 1.
3
Release the harness
2 from the guides.
Disconnect P/J132.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
NOTE: The transfer belt right latch kit includes the latch housing, transfer latch spring, transfer
rear right spring, transfer latch plate and transfer right latch arm.
Front
1. Remove the fuser assembly, REP 7.1.
2. Remove the waste box, PL 8.1 Item 7.
3. Remove the transfer belt assembly, REP 6.3.
4. Remove the front cover assembly, REP 19.1.
5. Remove the right side cover assembly, (C400 REP 19.5), (C405 REP 19.11).
2
Lift the assembly upwards and then towards the front
of the machine.
Replacement
1. Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. The transfer belt assembly is a HFSI. If installing a new transfer belt assembly, enter
dC135 then reset the counter.
3
Remove the transfer right latch Transfer rear right spring
housing, latch spring, rear right
spring, latch plate and right
latch arm from the shaft on the
frame.
Rear
2
Release the hook on the transfer
right latch arm from the frame.
1
Release the hook of the transfer
rear right spring from the frame.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the fuser assembly, REP 7.1.
2. Remove the transfer belt assembly, REP 6.3. 2
3. Remove the right side cover assembly, (C400 REP 19.5), (C405 REP 19.11). Pull out the dowel pin.
NOTE: Take care not to drop and lose the dowel pin.
4. Remove the coupling kit, Figure 1.
Rear
1
Remove the actuator
coupling.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Open the rear cover assembly, C400 PL 19.2A Item 10, C405 PL 19.2B Item 15.
2. Remove the fuser assembly, Figure 1.
Rear
1 2
Press up on the fuser latch to Remove the fuser assembly by the right
unlock the fuser assembly. and left side handles.
Replacement
1. Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. The fuser assembly is a HFSI. If installing a new fuser assembly, enter dC135 then reset
the counter.
2
WARNING Remove the harness from the
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- guide, then disconnect the P/J.
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
NOTE: The following procedure describes the removal of the transfer CRUM connector
Front
assembly connected to xerographic development assembly Y, PL 8.1 Item 2. However, the
removal procedure is identical for all 4 of the transfer CRUM connectors.
CAUTION
Ensure the xerographic development assemblies are stored in a dark location. The xero-
graphic development assemblies can be damaged by exposure to light.
3. Remove the xerographic development assemblies Y, M, C and K, PL 8.1.
4. Remove the Top Cover Assembly, (C400 REP 19.2), (C405 REP 19.7).
5. Remove the transfer CRUM connector assembly, Figure 1.
1
Remove the transfer CRUM connector assembly, 1 screw.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the 550 cassette assembly from the device, PL 10.3 Item 1.
2. Remove the cassette retard holder assembly, Figure 1.
2
Release the hook and slide
feed roll from the retard shaft.
1
Release the hook to remove the retard shaft, clutch
and feed roll assembly from the holder.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2
Lift the cassette retard holder assembly,
then slide the assembly sideways out of 1
the housing. Release the hook.
WARNING
Mandatory safety warning. This procedure must be performed by two people. The mod-
ule is heavy.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: The following procedure describes the removal of an optional 550-sheet feeder from a
C400. The removal procedure is identical for the C405.
1. Remove the 550 cassette assembly from the device, PL 10.3 Item 1.
WARNING
Use safe handling procedures when removing the module. Refer to GP 20. The module
is heavy.
NOTE: The weight of the C400 is 26kg (58lb). The weight of the C405 is 33kg (74lb).
1
Remove 2 screws.
Front 2
Hold the device at the
recessed areas on
3 both sides.
Raise and separate the device from the
optional 550-sheet feeder.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: The installation or removal of this part does not require the separation of the optional
550-sheet feeder from the device.
1. Remove the 550 option cassette assembly from the 550 optional feeder.
2. Remove the 550 option left side cover, Figure 1.
2
Release the two bosses
at the rear of the cover.
Front
3
Release the two bosses at the front of the
cover, simultaneously flex the rear of the
cover outwards.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the 550 option drive assembly, REP 10.4.
2. Remove the 550 option feed clutch assembly, Figure 1.
Recess
Front
2
Remove the E-clip, then pull the 1
550 option feed clutch assembly Disconnect P/J4213.
off the shaft.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: The installation or removal of this part does not require the separation of the optional
550 sheet feeder from the device.
1. Remove the 550 option cassette assembly from the optional 550-sheet feeder.
2. Remove the 550 option left side cover, REP 10.2.
1 Front
Disconnect P/J4221.
2
Remove 4 screws, then remove
the 550 option drive assembly.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: The installation or removal of this part does not require the separation of the optional NOTE: The installation or removal of this part does not require the separation of the optional
550 sheet feeder from the device. 550 sheet feeder from the device.
1. Remove the 550 option cassette assembly from the optional 550 sheet feeder. 1. Remove the 550 option cassette assembly from the optional 550 sheet feeder.
2. Remove the 550 option left side cover, REP 10.2. 2. Remove the 550 option left side cover, REP 10.2.
3. Remove the 550 option feeder PWBA, Figure 1.
PJ421 PJ423
PJ419
PJ422
PJ420
PJ1
1
Disconnect all the P/Js
on the 550 option feeder
PWBA.
Front
3 2
Remove 3 screws, then remove Slide the clamp to the left,
the 550 option feeder PWBA. then off the frame.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the optional 550-sheet feeder from the printer, REP 10.1.
2. Remove the 550 option feed clutch assembly, REP 10.3.
3. Remove the 550 option main feed assembly, Figure 1.
Front
2 1
Remove the screw then the 550 disconnect P/J4211.
option size switch assembly.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
4
Remove the E-ring, then pull
the 550 option registration
clutch assembly off of the
shaft.
4
Remove the 550 option
main feed assembly,
simultaneously thread
the harness though the Recess
machine frame.
3
Release the 550 option
registration clutch harness
from the harness guide.
Rear
3
Remove 2 screws.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2 1
Remove the screw and the Pull out the 550 option feeder
nudger spring bracket. gear and shaft.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the 550 option cassette assembly from the optional 550-sheet feeder.
2. Remove the optional 550-sheet feeder from the printer, REP 10.1.
3. Remove the feed roller assembly, Figure 1.
Rear
1
Release the clips holding the feed roller assemblies,
then slide the assemblies off the shafts.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
4
Remove the E-clip.
Front
3
Unlock, turn,
then slide the
duplex bearing
onto the shaft.
2a 2b
Unlock, then rotate the Slide the TA bearing off
TA bearing on the the shaft.
shaft.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
2a 2b
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Unlock then rotate the TA Slide the TA bearing off the
1. Remove the ROS assembly, REP 2.1. bearing on the shaft. shaft.
2. Remove main drive assembly, REP 3.1.
3. Remove the TA2 roller assembly, Figure 1. 3
Unlock, turn, then
slide the duplex
bearing onto the
shaft.
Front
4
1 Slide the TA2 roller to the left,
Release the hook then remove from the front of
then remove the the device.
turn gear.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Front
3
Remove 2
4 screws.
Pull the MSI tray frame assembly from the device while simultaneously
feeding the MSI harness through the hole in the device frame.
Figure 1 MSI tray frame assembly
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the MSI tray frame assembly, REP 13.3. 1. Remove the MSI tray frame assembly, REP 13.3.
2. Remove the MSI no paper sensor, Figure 1. 2. Remove the MSI tray detect sensor, Figure 1.
3
Press the tabs together to release
the MSI no paper sensor.
3
Press the tabs together
to release the MSI tray
detect sensor.
2
Unhook the MSI no paper
sensor and bracket.
1 2
Remove the MSI harness guide Disconnect P/J211.
1 and tray detect sensor, 1 screw.
Disconnect P/J212.
Figure 1 MSI tray no paper sensor Figure 1 MSI tray detect sensor
Replacement Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Front
1 2
Rotate the P/H motor counterclockwise. Rotate the feed roller assembly
90 degrees.
Front
4. Enter diagnostics dC330, code 041-001 Low voltage power supply, add code 071-007
MSI feed solenoid).
2
Release the hook, then slide the
MSI feed gear off the MSI feed
shaft.
1
Remove the feed spring.
Figure 3 Feed roll removal
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
4
Slide the MSI tray feed roller
3 assembly to the left and out
Release the hook, then slide of the machine.
the left MSI cam to the right.
Figure 1 MSI tray feed roller assembly
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the MSI tray frame assembly, REP 13.3. 1. Remove the MSI tray assembly, Figure 1.
2. Remove the MSI feed solenoid assembly, Figure 1.
3
Remove the MSI harness
guide and tray detect
sensor, 1 screw. 1
Remove the 550-sheet paper tray.
2
Pull the MSI tray assembly
out of the device.
2
Release the hook, then
slide the MSI feed gear off
the MSI feed shaft.
4
Disconnect
P/J214.
5 Front
Remove the MSI feed
solenoid, 1 screw.
1
Remove the Figure 1 MSI tray assembly
feed spring.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the MSI tray assembly, REP 13.9.
2. Open the MSI tray cover assembly, PL 13.3 Item 2.
3. Remove the MSI tray cover assembly, Figure 1.
Chute assembly 1
Flex the bosses of the MSI tray cover assembly
from the holes in the chute assembly.
Bosses
Bosses
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the 550 cassette assembly from the printer, PL 9.1 Item 1. 1. Remove the MSI tray assembly, REP 13.9.
2. Remove the MSI tray lower cover, Figure 1. 2. Remove the MSI tray cover assembly, REP 13.10.
3. Remove the MSI tray lower cover, REP 13.11.
NOTE: If the 2 clips are difficult to release, remove the MSI tray assembly first, REP 13.9.
NOTE: Figure 1 shows the MSI tray chute assembly as it appears after the covers are
removed.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the MSI tray assembly, REP 13.9.
2. Remove 2 screws then the front MSI bar, PL 13.3 Item 6.
3. Carefully flex both ends of the bottom plate assembly, (PL 13.3 Item 15) from the MSI
chute assembly, PL 13.3 Item 5.
4
Remove the retard holder
assembly, upwards and to the
right.
1
Remove the MSI retard
spring through the access
hole on the underside of
the MSI chute assembly.
2
Release the ends of the
MSI retard plate assembly
from the bosses.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the fuser assembly, REP 7.1.
2. Remove the CRU Transfer Roller Assembly, REP 14.3.
3. Remove the right side cover assembly, C400 REP 19.5, C405 REP 19.11.
4. Remove the left side cover, C400 REP 19.14, C405 REP 19.18.
5. Remove the ESS PWBA and EMMC Card, C400 REP 18.4, C405 REP 18.5.
2 Rear
Remove the ESS 1
rear plate. Remove 6 screws.
2
Position the rear cover assembly so
the right and left rear cover links
can be released from their keyed
bosses.
4
Slide the assembly
off the right hinge
plate.
Rear
2
Remove the S3
rear frame. 1
Remove 4 screws. 1
Disconnect the power
Figure 2 S3 rear frame
supply from the transfer
Rear HVPS PWBA.
3
Remove the left hinge shaft.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the duplex assembly, REP 14.1.
2. Remove the left side cover assembly, C400 REP 19.14, C405 REP 19.18.
3. Remove the 2 screws that attach the rear hinge bracket, refer to PL 14.1 Item 6.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the rear door assembly.
2. Remove the transfer roller, Figure 1.
1
Squeeze the tabs, then
remove the transfer
roller assembly in an
Rear
upwards direction.
Replacement
1. Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. The transfer roller assembly is a HFSI. If installing a new transfer roller assembly, enter
dC135 then reset the counter.
Rear
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1
Release the two bosses.
1. Remove the 550 option cassette assembly, PL 10.3 Item 1.
2. Remove the transfer HVPS TR PWBA, REP 18.12.
NOTE: The option 550 registration chute and lower registration chute are removed as an
assembly.
3. Remove the option 550 registration chute and lower registration chute, Figure 1.
Rear
2
Slide the lower and option 550 registration chute
assembly downward to release the hook.
Replacement
Position the left side of the lower and option 550 registration chute assembly, then swing the
right side into position. Align the mounting tabs with the holes in the frame, then snap the
assembly into place.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the fuser assembly, REP 7.1.
2. Remove the transfer belt assembly, REP 6.3.
3. Remove the upper transfer belt chute assembly, Figure 1.
1 3
Remove the screw and the color Release the left hook from the hole, then
toner density right guide. remove the upper transfer belt chute assembly.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the fuser assembly, REP 7.1.
2. Remove the rear cover assembly, C400 REP 19.13, C405 REP 19.16.
3. Remove the main drive assembly, REP 3.1.
4. Remove the S3 rear frame, Figure 1. 2
Remove the E-clip, then
pull the registration clutch
off the shaft.
Rear 1
Disconnect PJ 234, then
release the harness from
the harness guide.
Replacement
CAUTION
When replacing the registration clutch onto the shaft, observe the following to avoid damaging
the clutch and its harness:
• Position the clutch alignment slot over the tab on the registration clutch assembly.
• Carefully route the harness through the harness guide.
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Rear
2
Remove the S3 1
rear frame. Remove 4 screws.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the lower and option 550 registration chutes, REP 15.1.
2. Remove the cassette stopper, Figure 1.
Rear
1
Remove 1 screw and the
cassette stopper.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the duplex assembly, REP 14.1.
CAUTION
In the following step, avoid damaging the Mylar edge strip when removing the duplex chute
assembly. 2
2. Remove the duplex chute assembly, Figure 1. Remove the upper duplex chute
with the lower duplex chute.
1
Remove the screw. Rear
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot. Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the 550 option cassette assembly from the device PL 10.3 Item 1. 1. Remove the fuser assembly, REP 7.1.
2. Remove the duplex chute assembly, REP 15.5.
3. Remove the lower and option 550 registration chutes, REP 15.1. CAUTION
4. Remove the registration chute assembly, REP 15.7. Ensure the xerographic development assemblies are stored in a dark location. The xero-
Replacement graphic development assemblies can be damaged by exposure to light.
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. 2. Remove the xerographic development assemblies Y, M, C and K, PL 8.1.
3. Remove the color toner density (CTD) sensor assembly and springs, REP 6.2.
4. Remove the duplex assembly, REP 14.1.
5. Remove the left transfer belt guide assembly, REP 6.1.
6. Remove the lower and option 550 registration chutes, REP 15.1.
7. Remove the drive shaft assembly and bearings, REP 3.3.
8. Remove the registration clutch assembly, REP 15.3.
10. Disconnect the MCU PWBA and remove the harness, Figure 2.
Front
1
Remove the screw.
2
Release the 2 clips, then
1
remove the inner transfer
3 Disconnect P/J13, P/J23, P/J39.
wire housing assembly. Rear Remove the registration harness 2
through the hole in the frame. Release the harness clamp.
Figure 2 MCU board and harness
4
Remove the screw.
3
Release the harness from 5
the PH Harness Guide. Release the 2 hooks, then remove
the PH Harness Guide.
1
Ensure the 4 springs fit correctly
into the holes.
1
Remove the
screw.
3
Release the right lug on the
registration chute assembly
from the recess.
Rear
2
Remove 3 screws.
4
Move the registration clutch shaft along the
recess on the left frame to remove the assembly.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot. Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the registration chute assembly, REP 15.7. 1. Remove the left registration bearing, REP 15.8.
NOTE: Figure 1 illustrates removal of the left registration bearing. Removal of the right regis-
tration bearing is identical.
1
Unlock, rotate, then remove the
bearing.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the registration chute assembly, REP 15.7.
2. Remove the 550 option feed clutch assembly, Figure 1.
4
Remove the duplex clutch assembly.
2 3
Remove the 3 screws,
2
Remove the bearing.
then remove the Release the
duplex gear cover. 1 harness from
Disconnect P/J392. the harness
guide.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
4
Remove the 550 option feed
3 clutch assembly.
Remove the E-clip.
Figure 1 550 Option feed clutch assembly
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the 550 cassette assembly from the device, PL 9.1 Item 1.
2. Pull out the MSI Tray Assembly, PL 13.3 Item 1.
3. Remove the feed and nudger roll assemblies, Figure 1.
Nudger roll
1
Lift the tabs and slide
the feed and nudger
rolls off the shafts.
Feed roll
Rear
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
2
1. Remove the fuser, REP 7.1. Disconnect P/J151
2. Remove the exit cover, C400 REP 19.3, C405 REP 19.8. and P/J154.
3. Remove the exit assembly, Figure 1.
1
Remove 2 screws.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING Hook
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Hook
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the main drive assembly, REP 3.1.
2. Remove the exit assembly, REP 17.1.
3. Remove the exit drive assembly, Figure 1.
Front
3
Remove the
screw.
2 1
Release the harness from the clamp Disconnect P/J38 and P/J40.
and the harness guide.
Figure 1 Exit drive assembly
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the right side cover assembly, C400 REP 19.5, C405 REP 19.11.
2. Remove the LVPS PWBA, Figure 1.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the fuser assembly, REP 7.1.
2. Remove the right side cover assembly, C400 REP 19.5, C405 REP 19.11.
3. Remove the AC Inlet harness assembly, Figure 1.
4
Release the 2 clips, then
remove the AC Inlet.
Hook
Hook
Front
1 3
Disconnect P/J 48 from the Remove the AC inlet harness
LVPS PWBA. assembly, 2 screws.
2
Remove the grounding
wire, 1 screw.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Front
2
Remove the
Front screw.
3
4 5 Remove the LVPS upper duct. Harness clamps.
Release the 2 clips, then Remove 5 screws, then
remove the LV bottom remove the LVPS PWBA.
cap.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot. Front
1. Remove the fuser assembly, REP 7.1. 3
Remove 2 screws.
2. Remove the right side cover assembly, C400 REP 19.5, C405 REP 19.11.
2
Release the harness
from the harness
guide.
1
Disconnect P/J 42 from the LVPS PWBA.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Rear
CAUTION 1
Remove 7 screws.
Ensure that E.S.D. procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the ESS
PWBA. 2
Remove the ESS top plate.
CAUTION
Do not replace the MCU PWBA and ESS PWBA at the same time. If the MCU PWBA and ESS
PWBA both require replacement, ensure the ESS PWBA is installed first and that the device is Figure 2 ESS top plate
switched on then off before installation of the MCU PWBA. Failure to do so will cause corrup-
tion of the device data and render the device inoperable.
CAUTION
Only hold the ESS PWBA by the designated holding positions, refer to Figure 4.
NOTE: Observe the following when removing or replacing the ESS PWBA:
• Do not remove the battery from the ESS PWBA.
• Before removing the ESS PWBA, ensure any optional parts e.g., hard disk drive or
optional wireless kit are removed.
• If installing a new ESS PWBA, ensure the EMMC card is removed from the old ESS
PWBA and transferred to the new ESS PWBA before installation.
CAUTION
Only hold the ESS PWBA by the designated holding
positions. The 2 holding positions are shown on the Holding position
PWBA by the shaded areas. P/J1352
P/J631
2 1
Remove the hard Disconnect all the P/J connectors
from the ESS PWBA. P/J441
disk drive
bracket.
P/J302 P/J920
P/J310 P/J900
Holding position
4
Remove the
1 ESS PWBA.
Rear
Remove 3 screws.
Rear
2 3
Remove the 3 screws fixing the Remove the 5 screws
rear ports on the ESS PWBA. fixing the ESS PWBA.
EMMC card
CAUTION
Ensure that E.S.D. procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the ESS
PWBA.
CAUTION
Do not replace the MCU PWBA and ESS PWBA at the same time. If the MCU PWBA and ESS
PWBA both require replacement, ensure the ESS PWBA is installed first and that the device is
Old ESS PWBA switched on then off before installation of the MCU PWBA. Failure to do so will cause corrup-
tion of the device data and render the device inoperable.
NOTE: Observe the following when removing or replacing the ESS PWBA:
Figure 5 Transfer the EMMC card • Do not remove the battery from the ESS PWBA.
• Before removing the ESS PWBA, ensure any optional parts e.g., hard disk drive or
optional wireless kit are removed.
• If installing a new ESS PWBA, ensure the EMMC card is removed from the old ESS
PWBA and transferred to the new ESS PWBA before installation.
• The Address Book data is lost when installing a new ESS PWBA. If possible, use the
Address Book Editor to save any data before removing the ESS PWBA.
Holding position
CAUTION
Only hold the ESS PWBA by the desig-
2 nated holding positions. The 2 holding
Remove the fax plate. positions are shown on the PWBA by the
shaded areas.
1
Remove 3 screws.
1
Disconnect all the P/J connectors
from the ESS PWBA.
3
Remove 3
4 screws.
Remove the hard disk
drive bracket. 4
Remove the
Figure 2 Fax plate and hard disk drive bracket ESS PWBA.
Rear 3
Remove the 5 screws
fixing the ESS PWBA.
2
Remove the 3 screws fixing the
rear ports on the ESS PWBA.
2
Remove the ESS top plate
and WiFi release lever.
1
New ESS PWBA Remove the 8
screws.
WiFi release lever
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1 1. Remove the left side cover assembly C400, REP 19.14.
Disconnect
P/J1350. 2. Prepare to remove the front USB harness, Figure 1.
2
Remove the ESS top plate
and WiFi release lever.
3 2
Remove the Fax PWBA. Remove the 2 screws.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Rear
WiFi release lever
1
Remove the 7 screws.
Front WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the left side cover assembly C405, REP 19.18.
3
Remove 2 2. Remove the ESS top plate, PL 18.2 Item 1.
screws and 3. Remove the front USB harness, Figure 1.
the USB front
harness.
2
Remove the USB
front harness
from the harness
guide.
1
Disconnect P/J 631 from the ESS PWBA.
Front
Figure 2 Front USB harness C400
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. 2
Remove 2 screws and
the front USB harness.
1
Disconnect P/J 631.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
P/
WARNING P/
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- P/
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause P/
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. P/
1 P/
Disconnect all the PJ P/
connectors on the P/
MCU PWBA. P/
P/
P/ P/ P/ P/ P/ P/
CAUTION
Ensure that E.S.D. procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the MCU
PWBA.
2
CAUTION
Remove the 4
Do not replace the MCU PWBA and ESS PWBA at the same time. If the MCU PWBA and ESS screws.
PWBA both require replacement, ensure the ESS PWBA is installed first and that the device is
switched on then off before installation of the MCU PWBA. Failure to do so will cause corrup-
tion of the device data and render the device inoperable.
1. Remove the left side cover assembly, C400 REP 19.14, C405 REP 19.18.
3
Remove the MCU
PWBA.
Front
2 WARNING
Remove the ROM chip U303 from the old Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
MCU PWBA.
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
Ensure that E.S.D. procedures are observed during the removal and installation of the Devel-
Old MCU PWBA New MCU PWBA opment HVPS XD PWBA.
1. Remove the left side cover assembly, C400 REP 19.14, C405 REP 19.18.
3 1
Install the ROM chip U303 from the old Remove then dispose
MCU PWBA onto the new MCU PWBA. of the ROM chip U303
from the new MCU
PWBA.
3. After installing a new MCU PWBA perform dC132 Machine ID / Billing Data.
P/J181
P/J182
1
Remove 5
2 screws.
Release the development HVPS XD
PWBA from the 4 retaining clips.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Ensure that the 6 conductor springs are
in contact with the development HVPS XD PWBA.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the right side cover assembly, C400 REP 19.5, C405 REP 19.11.
2. Remove the left side cover assembly, C400 REP 19.14, C405 REP 19.18.
3. Remove the ESS PWBA, C400 REP 18.4, C405 REP 18.5.
4. C400 machines only, remove the ESS rear plate, Figure 1.
Rear
2
Remove the S3 1
rear frame. Remove 4 screws.
Rear 2
Remove the
ESS rear plate.
1
Remove 6 screws.
NOTE: Release the harness from the guide to allow enough slack to unplug the connector.
WARNING
6. Remove the transfer HVPS TR PWBA, Figure 3.
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
2 death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Release the 2 clips, 1. Remove the wireless adaptor, Figure 1.
then lift the transfer
HVPS TR PWBA away
from the frame just
enough to access the
connectors.
1 1
Rear Lift the release lever.
Remove 3 Rear
screws.
3
Disconnect PJ1821. 4 2
Disconnect the Faston connector, then Remove the wireless
remove the transfer HVPS TR PWBA. adapter.
Transfer HVPS TR PWBA
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Figure 1 Wireless adapter
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
CAUTION
Xerox does not recommend removal of the hard disk unless it is defective or the device is
being returned to Xerox. If the hard disk is thought to be defective, before removal, first create
a clone file of the hard disk data, GP 14. Once the hard disk is removed a factory initialization
from the special boot menu will be required, GP 16.
1. Remove the hard disk drive, Figure 1.
2
Remove the
hard disk drive.
Rear
1
Disconnect P/J 302 and
P/J 310.
Figure 1 Hard disk drive
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the main drive assembly, REP 3.1. 1. Refer to Figure 1 to locate the drive harness assembly.
2. Remove the varistor assembly, Figure 1.
Rear
Spring plate
2
Remove the varistor
assembly.
1
Remove the screw.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Refer to Figure 1 to locate the main harness assembly. 1. Refer to Figure 1 to locate the left side of the top harness assembly.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Refer to Figure 1 to locate the right side of the top harness assembly. 1. Refer to Figure 1 to locate the HVPS harness assembly.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Refer to Figure 1 to locate the dispenser motor harness assembly and main harness
assembly to the 550 optional cassette.
To dispenser motors
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Refer to Figure 1 to locate the ROS and MSI harnesses assemblies to MCU PWBA. 1. Refer to Figure 1 to locate the ROS video harness assembly to ESS PWBA
Figure 1 MCU PWBA to ROS and MSI harnesses Figure 1 ESS PWBA to ROS video harness
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the IOT 550 Cassette assembly, PL 9.1 Item 1.
2. Pull the MSI tray assembly out of the device, PL 13.3 Item 1.
WARNING
3. Remove the front cover assembly, Figure 1.
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
2 1. Open the rear cover assembly, PL 19.2A Item 10.
Rotate the ends of the 2 front 2. Open the front cover assembly, PL 19.1A Item 1.
straps 90 degrees, then 3. Remove the UI bottom left cover, REP 1.5.
remove the straps from the
device. 4. Remove the transfer belt assembly, REP 6.3.
5. Remove the exit cover, REP 19.3.
1 3
Open the front cover Flex the front cover assembly to release the
assembly. pivot pins on the cover from the device.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2
Remove the screw and
the left top under cover.
1
Raise the top cover assembly.
2 1
Disengage the top cover assembly Remove the 2 screws and the right hinge bracket.
from the left hinge bracket.
Coupling link
3
Disconnect top cover link 2 from the coupling Link.
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Ensure the top cover assembly is
installed correctly, Figure 3.
1
Locate the top cover into the
6 positions illustrated by the
arrows.
2
Connect the top cover link 2 with the coupling
link.
Coupling link
NOTE: It may be necessary to raise
the coupling link from inside the
device.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot. Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the top right cover, REP 19.4. 1. Open the rear cover assembly, PL 19.2A Item 10.
2. Remove the top left cover, REP 19.12. 2. Open the waste door assembly, PL 19.1B Item 35.
3. Remove the exit cover, Figure 1. 3. Remove the top right cover, Figure 1.
1
Remove 2 screws.
2
Remove the exit cover.
Rear
1
Remove the screw.
2
Slide the right top cover rearwards
to disengage the 2 tangs on the
side of the cover.
3
Front Pull the right top cover off the device.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the fuser assembly, REP 7.1.
2. Remove the top right cover, REP 19.4.
3. Remove the waste box lock, PL 6.1 Item 5.
4. Remove the waste box assembly, PL 8.1 Item 7.
5. Remove the front cover assembly, REP 19.1.
Front
4
Release the 2 bosses on the
2 rear of the cover, then remove
Release the 3 bosses on the right side cover assembly.
the front of the cover.
3
Release the 2 clips below the recessed grip,
simultaneously flex the front of the cover away
from the device.
Replacement
Secure the 2 clips on the bottom of the cover first, then engage the remaining bosses.
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the IOT 550 Cassette assembly, PL 9.1 Item 1.
2. Pull the bypass tray assembly out of the device, PL 13.3 Item 1.
WARNING
3. Remove the front cover assembly, Figure 1.
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
2 1. Remove the right upper inner cover assembly, REP 19.10.
Rotate the ends of the 2 front
straps 90 degrees, then
remove the straps from the
device.
Front
3
1 Flex the front cover assembly to release the
Open the front cover pivots pins on the cover from the device.
assembly.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Coupling link
Left inner side of the device Left side of the top cover assembly
B A
C B
1
Raise the top cover assembly.
Front
3
Remove the top cover
assembly.
Right side of the top cover assembly Right inner side of the device
Front
D D
E E
Figure 1 Top cover assembly C405
F F
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Open the rear cover, PL 19.2B Item 15.
2. Remove the exit cover, Figure 1.
Hook
Hook
1
Slightly flex the exit
cover to release the
hooks, then remove
the exit cover.
Coupling link
NOTE: It may be necessary to raise
the coupling link from inside the
device.
Rear
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the fuser assembly, REP 7.1.
2. Remove the waste box assembly, PL 8.1 Item 7.
3. Remove the waste box lock, PL 6.1 Item 5.
4. Remove the top cover assembly C405, REP 19.7.
5. Remove the upper right cover, Figure 1.
2
Release the hooks
and remove the
upper right cover
C405.
1
Remove 2 screws.
Front
Figure 1 Upper right cover C405
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot. Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Remove the scanner, REP 50.4. 1. Remove the upper right cover C405, REP 19.9.
2. Remove the exit cover C405, REP 19.8.
3. Remove the right upper inner cover C405, Figure 1.
1
Remove the 2 screws.
2
Remove the inner upper
right cover.
Rear
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the UI bottom left cover, REP 1.5.
2. Open the rear cover assembly, PL 19.2A Item 10.
3. Remove the top left cover, Figure 1.
3
Pull the left top cover off the left
side cover assembly.
1
Front Remove the screw.
4
Release the 2 bosses on the
2 rear of the cover, then remove
Release the 3 bosses on the right side cover assembly.
the front of the cover.
3
Release the 2 clips below the recessed grip,
simultaneously flex the front of the cover away
from the device. 2
Slide the left top cover rearwards to
disengage the 2 tangs on the left
Figure 1 Right side cover C405 side cover assembly.
Secure the 2 clips on the bottom of the cover first, then engage the remaining bosses.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Ensure the 2 tangs on the top left cover
engage with the left side cover.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the CRU transfer roller assembly, REP 14.3. 1. Remove the top left cover, REP 19.12.
2. Remove the rear cover assembly, Figure 1. 2. Remove the front cover assembly, REP 19.1.
3. Prepare to remove the left side cover assembly, Figure 1.
2
Position the rear cover assembly
so the right and left rear cover
links can be released from their
keyed bosses.
1
Remove the rear cover
assembly, 4 screws.
Rear 2
Remove 2 screws.
1
Undo the captive screw then slide the ESS cover
rearwards.
Figure 1 Rear cover assembly C400
Figure 1 ESS cover C400
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
1
Release the rear hook.
Front
2
Remove the 2
5 front screws.
Release the 2 rear bosses,
then remove the right side
cover assembly.
3
Release the 2 front bosses.
4
Release the 2 clips below the recessed grip, simul-
taneously flex the front of the cover away from the 3 Front
device.
2 Remove the front hook and
Release the 2 lower remove the IIT left outer base.
hooks.
Figure 2 Remove the left side cover assembly C400
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the CRU transfer roller assembly, REP 14.3. 1. Open the rear cover assembly, PL 19.2B Item 15.
2. Remove the rear cover assembly, Figure 1. 2. Remove the left rear lower cover C405, Figure 1.
2
Position the rear cover assembly
so the right and left rear cover
links can be released from their
keyed bosses.
1
Remove the rear cover
assembly, 4 screws. 1
Release the boss.
Rear
2
Slide the left rear lower cover upwards
until the 2 clips are released.
Figure 1 Rear cover assembly C405 Figure 1 Left Rear lower cover C405
Replacement Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the IIT left outer base, REP 19.15. 1
Remove the 4 rear
2. Prepare to remove the left side cover assembly, Figure 1. screws and 1 side
screw.
Front
2
Remove the 2
front screws.
3
Release the boss on the bottom
2 front of the left side cover assembly.
Remove 2 screws.
Rear
5 4
Release the bottom rear Release the 2 hooks below the recessed grip,
1 simultaneously flex the front of the cover away
boss, then remove the right
Undo the captive screw, then slide from the device.
side cover assembly.
the ESS cover rearwards.
Figure 2 Remove the left side cover assembly C405
Figure 1 ESS cover C405
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the scanner assembly, REP 50.4.
2. Remove the DADF assembly from the IIT assembly, Figure 1.
DADF assembly
3
Remove DADF assembly from the IIT
assembly.
IIT assembly
Hook
2 1
Figure 2 FFC Harness and earth cable routing
Release the hook, then remove the Release the hook on the rear of the left IIT cover,
left IIT cover cap in the direction of then remove the cover in the direction of the arrow.
the arrow.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF assembly from the IIT assembly, REP 50.1. 1. Remove the DADF tray assembly, Figure 1.
2. Remove the counterbalance assemblies, Figure 1.
2
Flex the tray to release
the 2 bosses.
1
Open the upper feeder
assembly.
2 1
Remove the right Remove 4
counterbalance. screws.
Right
3
Remove 4 screws.
4
Remove the left counterbalance.
WARNING 3
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Remove 2 screws, and
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause release the earth cables
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
2
Release the 2 clamps, then disconnect
PJ1377 and PJ1372.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot. 1
1. Remove the right side cover assembly C405, REP 19.11. P/J1370 P/J1372 Release the 2 clamps, then
disconnect P/J1374.
2. Remove the left side cover assembly C405, REP 19.18. P/J1371 P/J1374 P/J1377
3. Remove the scanner assembly, Figure 1.
Front 7
Remove the scanner assembly.
6
Remove 8 screws.
5
Remove the IIT
bottom base cap.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the upper feeder assembly. 1. Remove the DADF feeder roll, Figure 1.
2. Remove the DADF actuator, Figure 1.
2
Flex the DADF actuator
to release the 2 bosses.
3
Remove the
DADF feeder roll.
Right
1
Open the upper
feeder assembly.
Right
2
Rotate the 2 hooks on the feeder
1 roll shaft to release the bosses.
Open the upper feeder assembly.
Figure 1 DADF feed roll
Figure 1 DADF actuator
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
1
Remove the separator cover assembly
in the direction of the arrow.
2
Remove the DADF separator spring.
Right
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Adjustment
1. Enter diagnostics, dC131.
2. Enter the Chain-Link code 746-515.
3. Referring to Table 1, set the NVM value to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7, corresponding to which-
ever is closest to your altitude in meters. The default setting is 0. Use only the NVM val-
ues listed in Table 1.
Adjustment
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
If you accidentally get toner on your clothes, lightly dust them off as best as you can. If some
toner remains on your clothes, use cool water, not hot, to rinse off the toner. If toner gets on
your skin, wash it off with cool water and a mild soap. If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out
immediately with cool water then consult a doctor
4. Insert the lens cleaner assembly into the cleaning hole of one of the 4 CRU xerographic
development assemblies until it clicks, Figure 2.
6. Perform step 4 and 5 on the other three CRU xerographic development assemblies.
7. Return the lens cleaner assembly to its original location.
8. Re-install the waste box assembly.
If directed to this procedure from an image quality RAP, click the following link to return to IQ9
Vertical Blanks (line, band, spots).
Adjustment
Adjusting the Color Registration is accomplished in two ways:
10. Touch the fields on the touch screen to enter values for each LY, LM, and LC, use - and +
to adjust the value to what you circled in step 7.
11. Touch the fields on the touch screen to enter values for each RY, RM, and RC, use - and
+ to adjust the value to what you circled in step 8.
12. Touch the fields on the touch screen to enter values for each PY, PM, and PC fields, use -
and + to adjust the value to what you circled in step 9.
13. Touch Adjust (top right corner).
14. If necessary, then repeat the procedure until the color registration is corrected.
15. Touch close.
8. On the print sample; repeat the process for the right side calibration lines, RY, RM, and
RC.
10. Record the image position on the sample pages, use a ruler to measure the distance of
the printed image from the bottom and left edges.
11. Select the paper side for adjustment:
a. For adjusting Side 1, touch Adjusted Side, then touch Side 1.
b. For adjusting Side 2, touch Adjusted Side, then touch Side 2.
12. To adjust the registration, touch Lead/Side Registration:
a. To adjust the side-to-side registration, for Side Registration, touch Plus (+) or Minus
(-).
b. To adjust the top-to-bottom registration, for Lead Registration, touch Plus (+) or
Minus (-).
13. For reference, position the Sample pages so that Side-1 or Side-2 dots are at the bottom
of the page.
• For Lead Registration, a positive value shifts the image down the page.
• For Side Registration, a positive value shifts the image to the left.
The shift in image position can be calculated by measuring the distance of the printed
image from the bottom and left edges and making a comparison with original sample
pages.
14. If necessary repeat step12 and step13.
CAUTION
If you accidentally get toner on your clothes, lightly dust them off as best as you can. If some
CAUTION
toner remains on your clothes, use cool water, not hot, to rinse off the toner.
In the following step, do not use values higher than 16.
1. Remove the transfer belt, REP 6.3.
3. Adjust the value up or down as necessary to a value with the range 1-16. The default set-
2. Clean the color toner density (CTD) sensor, Figure 1.
ting is 6.
4. Touch Change, then touch OK.
Adjustment
Adjusting the transfer roller bias is is accomplished by adjustment of NVM values using a spe-
cific Chain-Link code.
CAUTION
In the following step, do not use values higher than 16.
4. Adjust the value up or down as necessary to a value with the range 1-16. The default set-
ting is 6.
5. Touch Change, then touch OK. If the fault persists Perform ADJ 6.2.
Adjustment
Changing the fuser assembly temperature for a particular paper type is accomplished by
adjustment of NVM values using a specific Chain-Link code, Table 1.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
When cleaning this product, only use the designated cleaning materials. Other cleaning mate-
rials may result in poor performance of the product. To prevent fires and explosions never use
Pull the tab to open the DADF chute cover,
aerosol cleaners. then hold it open.
1. Open the document cover. Inspect the document glass, CVT glass and white strip. If nec-
essary, clean them as follows
Clean the document glass, CVT glass, platen cushion and white reference strip using a Figure 2 Open the DADF chute
lint-free cloth or paper towel dampened with water, then wipe with a dry lint-free cloth or
paper towel until they are completely dry, Figure 1. 3. Clean the surface of the white reference strip, Figure 3.
Platen cushion
Clean the surface of the white reference strip, mirrored glass and the
Document glass rollers using a lint-free cloth dampened with water, then with a lint-free
cloth wipe until the parts are completely dry.
CVT glass
4. Gently close the DADF chute cover, then the document cover.
Adjustment
1. At the device user interface, enter service mode, GP 1.
2. Touch Device.
3. Touch Support.
4. Touch Scan Color Consistency.
5. Follow the on screen instructions.
6. Touch Start. The device will print a Printing Calibration Chart.
7. Follow the on screen instructions, then touch Start.
PL 7 - Fusing
PL 7.1 Fuser.................................................................................................................... 5-12
PL 8 - Xerographics
PL 8.1 Xerographics........................................................................................................ 5-13
PL 9 - Tray
PL 9.1 Tray...................................................................................................................... 5-14
PL 10 - Option Feeder
PL 10.1 Option Feeder (1 of 3) ....................................................................................... 5-15
PL 10.2 Option Feeder (2 of 3) ....................................................................................... 5-16
PL 10.3 Option Feeder (3 of 3) ....................................................................................... 5-17
PL 13 - MSI
PL 13.1 MSI (1 of 3) ........................................................................................................ 5-18
PL 13.2 MSI (2 of 3) ........................................................................................................ 5-19
PL 13.3 MSI (3 of 3) ........................................................................................................ 5-20
PL 14 - Duplex
PL 14.1 Duplex................................................................................................................ 5-21
PL 15 - Registration/Feeder
PL 15.1 Registration/Feeder (1 of 2)............................................................................... 5-22
PL 15.2 Registration/Feeder (2 of 2)............................................................................... 5-23
PL 17 - Exit
PL 17.1 Exit..................................................................................................................... 5-24
Sleep Mode
Sleep is selected from the Power Down Options window. When pressed, the device should
immediately enter sleep mode.
In this mode, the C405 IOT is operational for printing, copying, FAX received printing and
report printing.
In this mode, the IIT is operating for copy scanning, local scanning, network scanning, and
FAX sending.
When no jobs are executed for a certain period of time, the device enters this mode to reduce
standby electricity consumption. The user can set the time that the printer spends idle in Ready
mode before it shifts to Low Power mode for a period of 0 to 60 minutes. The factory default is
1 minutes for the C405, and 1 minutes for the C400.
The following conditions trigger the printer to exit Low Power mode and return to Ready mode:
• Pressing Power button the operator panel
• Front cover open
After the Low Power Mode has continued for 1 minute, the device enters Sleep mode to reduce FPOT (First Print Output Time) and FCOT (First Copy Output Time)
the standby electricity consumption. Refer to Table 3 for the time required for the first sheet of paper to exit the printer after pressing
the start button.
Sleep mode is cancelled by:
• Pressing Energy Saver button on the UI. Table 3 First print/copy output time
• Receiving a print job
Mode Platen DADF
• Receiving a Fax job (C405 only).
B/W 20 sec. or less 20 sec. or less
• Detecting hook-off of external telephone (Default:off).
Color 22 sec. or less 22 sec. or less
• Report printing directions from CWIS.
• At the time of USB memory insertion.
Input Capacities
• At the start of sending polling data, if start time specified by the operator (C405 only).
Refer to Table 4 for media tray capacities:
Machine State
Refer to Table 1 for running modes during machine states: Table 4 Input capacities
Table 8 Supported paper types and weights for automatic 2-sided printing
Paper Types Weights
Bond 60-163 g/m2 (16-60 lb)
Procedure To update the system software on the device or when a repair procedure requires the software
to be reinstalled.
NOTE: The close proximity of cables to moving parts makes proper routing essential. If com-
ponents are removed, any cables disturbed by the procedure must be restored as close as Obtaining the Software and Firmware Download Manager Tool
possible to their original positions. Before removing any component from the device, note the
The firmware download manager tool (FWDLMgr.exe) and the device firmware file (.bin) can
cable routing that will be affected.
be downloaded from the Xerox.com, product Support & Drivers page.
Whenever servicing the device, perform the following:
1. Check the replacement part number. Procedure
2. Check to verify that jobs are not stored in memory. There 4 methods available to download the device system software:
3. Switch off the machine, GP 4. 1. Firmware Download Manager Tool via Port 9100, using the customers network or ether-
4. Use a flat and clean surface. net crossover cable.
5. Only install authorized components. 2. Firmware Download Manager Tool via the rear USB Type B Port, via the rear USB cable
connection from a PC to the device.
6. Do not forcibly remove plastic components.
3. USB Flash Drive Software Loading, via the front USB port.
7. Ensure all components are in their correct position.
4. Embedded Web Server Software Loading, via an internet connection.
8. When replacing screws into plastic components, turn the screw counterclockwise to
engage the original thread, then turn the screw clockwise. Do not overtighten. If a new Firmware Download Manager Tool via Port 9100
thread is cut, the plastic component will lose the ability to hold the screw. This also Perform the steps that follow:
applies to metal components. 1. Download the appropriate firmware download manager tool (FWDLMgr.exe), C400 or
C405 to a location on your PC or laptop, refer to Obtaining the Software and Firmware
Download Manager Tool.
2. Download the appropriate firmware (.bin) file to a location on your PC or laptop, refer to
Obtaining the Software and Firmware Download Manager Tool.
3. Connect a PC or laptop onto the same network as the device or connect a laptop to the
device via a ethernet crossover cable, refer to GP 25 Ethernet Crossover Cable Setup.
4. Switch on the power for the PC or laptop and the device, GP 4. When the device reaches
the Ready state, print a configuration report, GP 18.
5. Ensure the IP address (refer to the configuration report) of the device can be pinged from
the PC or laptop:
a. From an internet connected PC or laptop, open a command window (CMD):
• If running Windows XP, click on Start, then select Run. Type CMD in the Run
dialog box, then press Enter.
• If running Windows 7, select Start and in the Search box above the Start but-
ton, type CMD, then press Enter.
NOTE: If the Windows key is enabled (the key located in the lower left corner with
the Microsoft logo), hold the Windows key down, press R and release both keys to
open the Command window.
b. In the Command window (where the blinking cursor is) type ping. Press the space
bar once, then enter the IP address of the device. Press Enter.
c. If the ping command is successful, the device will reply reply four times. This should
not take more than two or three seconds.
10. Select Network (Port9100) on the Communication Interface Selection screen, then touch
Next, Figure 3.
Figure 1 License agreement
8. Select the Printer model from the pull-down menu then browse to where the firmware file
(.bin) is located and double click the .bin file, then touch Add and then touch Next, Figure
8.
Firmware Download Manager Tool via the rear USB Type B Port
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Download the appropriate firmware download manager tool (FWDLMgr.exe), C400 or
C405 to a location on your PC or laptop, refer to Obtaining the Software and Firmware
Download Manager Tool.
2. Download the firmware (.bin) file, refer to Obtaining the Software and Firmware Download
Manager Tool.
3. 1.Connect a PC or laptop to the device with a USB cable (Type A to Type B, male on both
ends).
NOTE: For both the C400 and C405, the USB Type B port is on the back of the device).
6. Enter special boot mode, GP 16. Select Download Mode on SPECIAL BOOT MENU 1/3,
then touch YES. The UI will display SW update progress and the machine will eventually
reboot.
Figure 11 Result
CAUTION
USB Flash Drive Software Loading Do not switch off the device until the reboot is complete. The device will reboot after the down-
Perform the steps that follow: load is complete.
7. After the download is complete the device will reboot and a Software Upgrade Report will
1. Download the firmware (.bin) file, refer to Obtaining the Software and Firmware Download print out. The process is complete and the USB memory device can be removed.
Manager Tool.
2. Create a Folder named “DWLD” in the USB Flash drive. Embedded Web Server Software Loading
3. Store the firmware download file (.bin) in the “DWLD” folder There are 3 options available for updating the system software via the embedded web page
4. Switch off the device GP 4. • Check now.
• Periodic Updates.
• Updates with File Specified.
Check now
NOTE: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWBA names shown are an example
only. Go to the wiring diagram associated with the RAP for the correct information.
NOTE: In cases where the motor may be driven forward or backward, the same two feed wires
are used, but the voltages on them are reversed, to reverse the motor direction. Such motors
may have two component control codes, for forward and reverse. A typical application is a tray
lift motor with a tray-up and a tray-down direction
1. Check the drive voltage when the component control code for the motor is entered. If the
drive voltage is measured, install a new motor. If the drive voltage is not measured, con-
tinue to the next step.
2. Check that the drive voltage can be measured on the PWBA when the component control
code for the motor forward is entered. If no drive voltage is measured, check the power to
the PWBA. If the power is good install a new PWB. If the drive voltage is measured at the
PWBA, check the wiring to the motor. Repair or install new wiring.
DC Motor with integral Encoder
NOTE: This type of motor has the normal drive voltages for a DC motor, plus the +3.3V and 0V
lines for the encoder. The encoder has two outputs, A and B, producing pulses when the motor
is on. When the motor is running in one direction, the encoder A pulses lead the encoder B
pulses. In the other direction, encoder B pulses lead encoder A pulses. In this way the control-
ler can detect that the motor is running in the correct direction.
1. Check the drive voltage when the component control code for the motor is entered. If the
drive voltage is present at the motor, install a new motor. If the drive voltage is not pres-
ent, go to step 2.
Initial Actions NOTE: Figure 1 shows an interlock switch actuated by the closing of a door.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
1. For a clutch, check that the shafts, gears, rolls etc., associated with the clutch are free to
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
rotate, clean and lubricated where applicable.
Manually check that the switch operates. Ensure that the magnet or other actuator has enough
2. For a solenoid, check that the solenoid is free to actuate and that the mechanisms associ- mechanical movement to operate the switch.
ated with the solenoid are free to move.
Procedure NOTE: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example only.
Go to the wiring diagram associated with the RAP for the correct information.
NOTE: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example only.
Go to the wiring diagram associated with the RAP for the correct information. Procedure
NOTE: When a solenoid is energized in diagnostics, movement is seen. When a clutch is ener- 1. Enter diagnostics and check the switch. The switch is operating correctly, check and
gized in diagnostics, the sound of the clutch action is heard. If possible, run the motor con- adjust the mechanism that actuates the switch.
nected to the clutch to confirm when the clutch is energized. 2. Refer to Figure 1, then disconnect the switch.
3. +5V is available between pin 1 and pin 2 on the wiring side of the connector.
1. Enter the dC330 output code for the clutch or solenoid. If the clutch or solenoid does not
energize, continue with step 2. 4. +5V is available at PJ231 between pins 1 and 2 on the PWB.
2. Refer to Figure 1 to disconnect PJ17, check for +24V at pin 1 on the wiring side of the 5. Check the supply voltage. If +5V is available, install a new PWB.
connector, If the voltage is not correct, trace the faulty component. 6. Check the wiring between PJ231 and the switch. Repair or install new parts as neces-
3. Reconnect PJ17, enter the dC330 output code for the clutch or solenoid, while measuring sary.
the voltage between pin 1 and ground. If the voltage does not change when the code is 7. Install a new switch.
entered, install a new PWB.
4. There may be an intermittent fault, perform the actions that follow:
a. Check the wiring. Repair or install new components as necessary.
b. Operate the clutch or solenoid under normal running conditions. If the clutch or sole-
noid operates intermittently or with hesitation, install new parts.
c. Check that the clutch or solenoid has enough drive to operate the mechanism to
which it is attached; if necessary, install a new clutch or solenoid.
NOTE: If the PWS has a wireless Ethernet card/adapter installed, Windows will not use the
wired Ethernet port by default until either the PWS is rebooted or you temporarily disable the
wireless Ethernet card. If unsure how to disable/enable your wireless Ethernet card, restart the
PWS after setting the IP address.
For W7:
1. Open the Control Panel.
2. Select Network Sharing Center.
3. Select Change Adaptor Settings in the upper left corner of the Control Panel.
4. Right-click on Local Area Connection, then select Properties.
5. On the Networking tab (for local area connection), click on Internet Protocol Version 4
(TCP/IPv4), then select Properties.
6. Select Use the following IP address and enter an IP address similar to the device to
manually set the PWS IP address and subnet mask to match the device’s IP configuration
settings.
7. Click OK twice and exit Network Connections and return to Creating the Clone File.
For XP:
1. Click Start and select Control Panel.
2. Click Network and Internet Connections and then select Network Connections.
3. Right-click on Local Area Connection and then select Properties.
4. On the General tab (for local area connection), click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then
click on Properties.
5. Click Use the following IP address to manually set the computer's IP address and sub-
net mask to match the device’s IP configuration.
6. Click OK twice to exit Network Connections and return to Creating the Clone File.
PWS Browser Proxy Server Setting
The following steps ensure the proxy server settings are correct.
1. Open Windows Internet Explorer.
NOTE: It may not be possible to obtain a device log if the device executed a reboot after an Procedure
error occurred. To enable the device log collection enter dC131 then set the NVM chain-link 1. Enter special boot mode: with the device in the power off state, refer to GP 7, simultane-
code 700-530 value to 0. Repeat the device log procedure then reset the NVM chain-link code
ously press then hold down the Home and Power buttons until the device powers on and
700-530 value back to 1.
the 1st level SPECIAL BOOT MENU appears, Table 1 and Figure 1.
Procedure 2. To enter the 2nd level menu, simultaneously touch the letters A in SPECIAL, B in BOOT
and the Home button. Do not hold any of the three locations, just touch/press then
Audit Log
release simultaneously, Figure 1.
To obtain the Audit Log:
1. Obtain the machine’s IP address by printing a configuration report, GP 18.
2. Access the web UI by entering the IP address into a web browser on a PC on the same
network as the machine.
3. Log in to the web UI as an administrator, refer to GP 3.
4. Ensure HTTP - SSL/TLS is enabled:
a. Click Connectivity.
b. Click HTTP.
c. Enable HTTP (SSL).
d. Click OK. You will be prompted to restart the machine, click Restart Now.
5. When the machine restarts, log back in as an administrator, then click System.
6. Click Logs. Figure 1 Accessing special boot mode
7. Click Audit Log.
8. Click Enable. 3. At the keypad screen enter code number: 6789#. The SPECIAL BOOT MENU 1/3 screen
will display.
9. Click Export. The auditlog.txt file is downloaded via the web browser.
Device Log
To obtain the Device Log: CAUTION
1. Obtain the machine’s IP address by printing a configuration report, GP 18. Do not turn off the device until the reboot is complete. The device will reboot after the download
2. Access the web UI by entering the IP address into a web browser on a PC on the same is complete.
network as the machine. 4. Scroll through SPECIAL BOOT MENU screens 1/3, 2/3 and 3/3 to select the appropriate
3. Log in to the web UI as an administrator, refer to GP 3. function, refer to Table 2, then follow the on screen instructions. The device may reboot
then print a report.
4. Click System.
5. Click Logs. Table 1 1st Level Menu
6. Click Device Log.
Function Display Description
7. Click Accept. The devicelog.dat file is downloaded via the web browser.
HDD INITIALIZE --BOOT MODE-- Initializes the spool area, HDD/EMMC CARD
MODE HDD INITIALIZE MODE Initialization is performed for the predeter-
ARE YOU SURE? mined area of HDD/EMMC CARD partition,
YES other areas are not effected.
NO
The preferred method of verifying the phone line functionality is to use the modem saver
• Configuration Report
device part number 600T2133 to ensure the fax line is wired correctly and to use the Analog
• Billing Summary Report
hand set part number 600T1937 or customer’s analog phone to place calls on the line. Be sure
that both local and long distance calls can be placed and the line quality is clear, no static. • Supplies Usage Report
• PostScript Font List
Use a Handset: • PCL Font List
• Can it dial externally on the line? • Demonstration Print
• Can it receive a call on the line? • Startup Page
• Evaluate Line quality. Check Line for unwanted beeps, or noise. Configuration Report
Use Breakout Box to measure voltages (Use the device chassis as ground). Refer to Fax 101 The Configuration Report lists the current state of system configuration parameters including
training for Breakout Box usage instruction: installed options and network settings.
• Check ground continuity.
• Line Voltage -20 to -50 VDC? Billing Summary Report
• Loop Current 15 to 95 mA DC? The Billing Summary Report lists Device Information, Billing Meter impression counters (for
• Ring Signal 50 to 90 VAC? customers on billing meter supplies plans only) and Sheet Count by Paper Type.
Demonstration Print
This report shows a brief synopsis of the device.
Startup Page
This report lists device type, software versions, enabled protocols and mobile connectivity.
Procedure
Reports are printed from the Control Panel
NOTE: It is not necessary to enter SA mode (log in) in order to perform this procedure.
Procedure Procedure
When removing heavy modules from a device, the instructions that follow must be observed:
1. Ensure that a suitable stable surface to support the module after removal is located in CAUTION
close proximity to the device.
Only use lubricants as directed. Incorrect use of lubricants could seriously affect the perfor-
NOTE: Other parts of a machine are not a suitable stable surface. mance of the device.
Take the following precautions when performing device lubrication:
2. Ensure that the height of the support surface is between 750mm and 1000mm (30 inches
and 39 inches). • Wear disposable gloves.
3. Ensure that there are no hazards or obstacles between the device and the support sur- • Only use lubricants that are specified in the procedure.
face. • Only lubricate parts as directed.
4. If instructed to remove the module toward the rear of the device and only 1 person is • Apply only the smallest amount of lubricant, sufficient to lubricate the parts. To prevent
available, the module must be removed while standing at the rear of the device. If 2 peo- contamination, remove any surplus lubricant.
ple are available, the module may be removed while standing at the front of the device. • Take great care not to contaminate other parts with the lubricant.
5. Two people are required if the module is to be lifted onto the floor or lifted from the floor.
WARNING
Do not work in a confined space. 1 m (39 inches) space is needed for safe working.
599 mm
WARNING
USA and Canada. Do not install this machine in a hallway or exit route that does not
have 1.12 m (44 inches) of space additional to the normal space requirements in front of
the machine. To conform with fire regulations this additional 1.12 m (44 inches) of space
is needed in front of the machine in hallway and exit route
Dimensions and Mass of the C405
Refer to Table 1 for the device mass. The C405 dimensions are shown in Figure 1 and Figure
2 with MSI Tray cover and scanner cover closed.
540 mm
Table 1 Printer mass 432 mm
Printer Mass
C405 32.7 kg (72lb)
Optional 550-sheet feeder 2.6 kg (5.7 lb)
1. In order to function correctly, the device must be placed on a flat surface with the follow-
ing minimum clearances shown in Figure 3 and Figure 4 with the optional 550-sheet
feeder.
738 mm
m m
400
920 mm
100
mm
540 mm
432 mm
400
mm
mm
40
Figure 2 Dimensions w/option 550 932 15
mm
1058 mm
m
400
100
mm
400
mm
mm
40
932 15 399 mm
mm
1. In order to function correctly, the device must be placed on a flat surface with the follow-
ing minimum clearances shown in Figure 7 and Figure 8 with the optional 550-sheet
feeder.
538 mm
m m
400
600 mm
100
mm
488 mm
491 mm
400
m m
mm
991 88
14
m m
Figure 6 Dimensions w/option 550
738 mm
m m
Table 1 First print/copy output time
FPOT
Color FPOT (Power Saver/ FPOT
Mode (Ready) Sleep) (from cold) FCOT
B/W As fast as 13 sec As fast as 24 sec 26.0 sec Platen: 20 sec
DADF simplex: 22
sec
400 Color As fast as 14 sec As fast as 25 sec 26.0 sec Platen: 20 sec
m m
m DADF simplex: 22
8m
991
mm 148 sec
NOTE: Currently these restrictions are only for the European Union (EU) market and some WARNING
associated countries. For more information go to www.Xerox.com. However, Xerox has man-
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
dated that all Xerox® VersaLink® C400 and C405 devices must be maintained as RoHS com-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
pliant.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
The hazardous substances are: 1. Print a configuration report, GP 18.
• Lead (Pb) 2. Ensure that Windows firewall and wireless network connectivity on the laptop are turned
• Mercury (Hg) off.
• Cadmium (Cd) 3. Record the IP address and Subnet Mask of your laptop.
• Hexavalent Chromium (Cr 6+, Cr [VI])
• Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE’s) CAUTION
• Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB’s) Before you change the value of a setting ensure the original value is recorded. All the
original values will need to be restored to the laptop at the end of the procedure.
Identification of a RoHS Compliant Device a. Open a command window on the laptop
Xerox will maintain a central list of RoHS compliant devices. • If running Windows XP, click on Start, then select Run. Type CMD in the Run
dialog box, then press Enter.
All Xerox® VersaLink® C400 and C405 devices are RoHS compliant at time of manufacture. • If running Windows 7, select Start and in the Search box above the Start but-
ton, type CMD, then press Enter.
Procedure NOTE: If the Windows key is enabled (the key located in the lower left corner with
the Microsoft logo), hold the Windows key down, press R and release both keys to
CAUTION open the Command window.
Failure to comply with RoHS guidelines can result in product recalls, imprisonment, fines or b. Type ipconfig at the command prompt, then make a note of your Local Area Con-
penalties. nection : IPv4 Address and Subnet Mask.
Use only spares that are listed in the Xerox® VersaLink® C400 and C405 Spare Parts List. Do 4. Configure the LAN connection of the laptop to enable communication with the device.
not use spare parts from other similar devices, even if the parts look identical. All Xerox® Ver- Perform the relevant procedure:
saLink® C400 and C405 devices are RoHS compliant at time of manufacture and must be • Windows 7.
maintained as RoHS compliant.
• Windows XP.
7. Refer to the configuration report. Set the IP address of the laptop one number higher than
the device. For example, if the IP address of the device is 192.168.196.112, set the IP
address of the laptop to 192.168.196.113.
8. Refer to the configuration report. Set the Subnet mask of the laptop to the same as the
Subnet mask of the device.
9. Click on OK to close the properties dialog box, then OK to close the second properties
dialog box.
Figure 1 Properties window 10. Close the Local Area Connection Status dialog box.
11. Connect the ethernet crossover cable to the device, then continue with your procedure.
5. Double-click the entry Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4).
6. Select Use the following IP address. Enter the IP address and subnet mask, Figure 2.
5. Refer to the configuration report. Set the IP address of the laptop one number higher than
the device. For example, if the IP address of the device is 192.168.196.112, set the IP
address of the laptop to 192.168.196.113.
6. Refer to the configuration report. Set the Subnet mask of the laptop to the same as the
Subnet mask of the device.
Figure 3 Properties window
7. Select OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
8. Select OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
9. Connect the ethernet crossover cable to the device, then continue with your procedure.
• Maintain constant temperatures and relative humidity Criterion At least 90% of the copy samples shall satisfy the defined copy
quality at a 90% reliability level.
• Avoid attics, kitchens, garages, and basements. Inside walls are drier than outside walls
where moisture can collect.
• Store flat. Media should be stored on pallets, cartons, shelves, or in cabinets.
• Do not open sealed packages until needed. Leave media in the original packaging. For
most commercial grades, the wrapper’s inner lining protects the media.
The printer should be stored and operated under the environmental conditions shown in Table Table 3 Noise levels
1:
Operating Mode Sound Power (B) Sound Pressure (dB)
Table 1 Operating environment Running 6.9B 53dB
Characteristic Specification Standby 50B 29dB
Installation Temperature / Installation temperature and humidity on the condition without con-
Humidity densation is as follows.
Operating: 10-32degC, 10-85%RH (No condensation)
Storage: minus 20-40degC, 5-85%RH (No condensation)
Installation Altitude 0 to 3,100m
Installation Horizontality Longitudinal levelness of table surface on which the printer is
installed
Longitudinal: 1 degree or under
Lateral: 1 degree or under
Storage Temperature of The guaranteed period of the Toner Cartridge before unpacked is
a Toner Cartridge as follows:
Normal conditions: 24 months under 0 to 35degC, 15 to 80%RH.
Harsh conditions: 1 month under -20 to 0degC and 35 to 40degC,
5 to 15%RH and 80 to 90%RH.
The storage altitude shall be 0 to 3,100m. Can be extended to 0 to
15,000m when shipped by air.
(Provided that the cargo bay is pressurized to 70.9275Kpa or
higher.
Acoustic Noise Operation: 56.0 dB
Sound Pressure (Deci- Standby or Ready: 30.0 dB
bels)
NOTE: Enter the passcode within 500 page counts of when it was issued, or it will not be valid.
5. Enter the passcode string provided in Step 4, then touch Apply.
• Table 2 USB 2.0 Type-A Interface Port Specifications Connector One RJ-45 connector
• Table 3 Ethernet Interface Port Specifications Protocol 10 Base-T / 100 Base-TX / 1000 Base-T compatible
• Table 4 Wireless Interface Port Specifications
• Table 5 FAX Connection C405 only Wireless
• Table 6 Foreign Device Interface (FDI) Wireless adapter is required.
Connection to public line RKJ11 modular jack (2wire) Protocol Transport Application / Usage Remarks
Terminal for external telephone RKJ11 modular jack (2wire) HTTP/HTTPS TCP/IP EWS
SMTP TCP/IP E-Mail Alert
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) SNMP v1/v2c/v3 UDP/IP Driver, Installer, Management SNMP v3 Default OFF
DHCP UDP/IP IP setup
Table 6 FDI connection
BOOTP UDP/IP IP setup
Item Specification RARP TCP/IP IP management
This connector is used to use the functions One Din10 pin connection providing 5V/ AutoIP TCP/IP Installer (Device discovery)
that access the machine via the 3rd party 120mA to connected devices. WINS TCP/IP IP setup
accessories like as IC Card Reader/Coin Kit
Telnet TCP/IP IP management
(Authentication/Auditron)
Bonjour (mDNS) UDP/IP IP setup for Mac
LDAP TCP/IP Address Book,ColorTrack Pro1.1
Network Protocol LDAPS TCP/IP Address Book,ColorTrack Pro1.1 HDD option required
Printing Protocol
DNS TCP/IP IP management
Printing protocol is shown in Table 7:
DDNS TCP/IP IP management Default OFF
FlashROM: 4MB Communication Control Proto- Comply with ITU-T recommendation T.30
col
Connectable Network Nonstandard Function Not supported
The Fax can be connected to the following communication networks:
• PSTN Transmission Time
• PBX Image Data transmission time (Tp) of image data in G3 mode is as follows (Table 2).
The Fax cannot be connected to the following communication networks:
Resolution conversion is not performed during transmission, and density is normal.
• ISDN communication network
• VoIP network Specified value condition: ECM (No data error)
Mutual Communication Ability
Table 2 Fax transmission time
Fax mutual communication ability specifications are show in Table 1:
14.4 Kbps 28.8 Kbps 33.6 Kbps
Table 1 Fax Mutual communication ability Chart (MMR) (MMR) (JBIG)a
Characteristic Specification IIEEJ No.4 Super Fine 56 sec. or less 29 sec. or less 22 sec. or less
Fine 26 sec. or less 13 sec. or less 11 sec. or less
Communication Mode Priority 1: ITU-T Super G3
Priority 2: ITU-T G3 ECM Standard 19 sec. or less 10 sec. or less 7 sec. or less
Priority 3: ITU-T G3 ITU-T No.1 Super Fine 30 sec. or less 15 sec. or less 12 sec. or less
Fine 15 sec. or less 8 sec. or less 6 sec. or less
Notes:
Standard 11 sec. or less 6 sec. or less 4 sec. or less
ITU: International Telecommunication Union
FX English sales Text Standard 7 sec. or less 4 sec. or less 2 sec. or less
ITU-T: ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector
ECM: Error Correction Mode FX Japanese sales Text Standard 9 sec. or less 5 sec. or less 4 sec. or less
Modem Signal Processing The following communication standards are supported: IIEEJ No.1 Standard 75 sec. or less 38 sec. or less 20 sec. or less
• V.34 (33.6 /31.2 /28.8 /26.4 /24 /21.6 /19.2 /16.8 /14.4 / a. Reference value
12 /9.6 /7.2 /4.8 /2.4 kbps)
• V.17 (14.4 /12 /9.6 /7.2 kbps) Protocol Control Time
• V.29 (9.6 /7.2 kbps) When no data error occurs, protocol control time (Tm, Tn, Tu) is as shown in Table 3:
• V.27ter (4.8 /2.4 kbps)
Table 3 Fax protocol control time
Pixel Transmission Density (on B/W:
the supported transmission • R16 x 15.4 line/mm Before: Between After
path) Mode messages: Tm messages: Tn messages: Tu Total
• R8 x 15.4 line/mm
• R8 x 7.7 line/mm V.17, V.29, V.27ter 16.4 sec. or less 3.2 sec. or less 4.4 sec. or less 24.0 sec. or less
Standard Protocol
• R8 x 3.85 line/mm
-V.34 9.9 sec. or less 1.0 sec. or less 0.9 sec. or less 11.8 sec. or less
• 600 x 600 pixel/25.4 mm (Super Fine)
Standard Protocol
• 400 x 400 pixel/25.4 mm (Super Fine)
• 300 x 300 pixel/25.4 mm (Fine)
In G3 mode, when a data error that exceeds the threshold occurs, Tn increases by approxi-
• 200 x 200 pixel/25.4 mm (Fine)
mately 6 seconds.
• 200 x 100 pixel/25.4 mm (Standard)
Color: Not supported In ECM (Error Correction Mode), according to the number of resending operations performed
Communication Image Size Fast scan direction size on communication is 215 mm +/- 1% for the occurred data error, Tn increases by approximately Tn+1 seconds for each resending
operation.
Halftone/Compression Method B/W: 1bit, JBIG, MMR, MR, MH encoding
Color: Not supported
CAUTION
• Do not remove the covers or guards that are fastened with screws. You cannot maintain
or service any parts that are behind these covers and guards. Do not attempt any mainte-
nance procedure that is not described in the documentation supplied with your printer
• When cleaning your printer do not use organic or strong chemical solvents or aerosol
cleaners. Do not pour fluids directly into any area. Use supplies and cleaning materials
only as directed in this documentation.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Disconnect the power cord GP 4. Electricity can cause death or
injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Clean the exterior of the printer once a month.
• Wipe the paper tray, output tray, control panel, and other parts with a damp, soft cloth.
• After cleaning, wipe with a dry, soft cloth.
• For stubborn stains, apply a small amount of mild detergent to the cloth and gently wipe
the stain off.
PIN Personal Identification Number RS-232, RS-423, Series of standards for serial communication of data by wire. RS-232
RS-422, RS-485 operates at 20kbits/s, RS-423 operates at 100kbits/s, RS-422 and RS-
ping Packet InterNet Groper. Tool to test connections between nodes by
485 operate at 10Mbits/s. See FireWire and USB.
sending and returning test data.
RTC Real Time Clock
PME Power Management Event
Rx Receive
POPO Power Off Power On
S2F Scan-to-File
POO or P of O Principles of Operation
SA Systems Administration
POST Power On Self Test
SAKO Systems Administration Key Operator
POTS Plain Old Telephone System
SAR Semi-Active Retard feeder
PPM Prints per minute / Parts Per Million
SBC Single board controller. Copy, print and UI controllers all on one PWB
PR Photo-Receptor
within the image processing module.
Process Death A process has stopped working.
SCD Software Compatibility Database
PS Post Script
SD Secure Digital, memory card format
PS Power Supply
SDIO Secure Digital Input/Output
PSTN Private Switched Telephone Network
PSW Portable Service Workstation
Procedure Procedure
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1. 1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch dC118 Jam Counter. 2. Touch dC120 Failure Counter.
NOTE: There will be a delay while the machine retrieves the jam counter data. NOTE: There will be a delay while the machine retrieves the fault counter data.
NOTE: Faults that have occurred since the previous exit from the Service Mode with (Exit 3. A list of faults that have occurred on the machine is displayed.
(Clear Log) will be displayed. 4. Touch the back button (top left) to return to the diagnostics screen.
3. A list of jams that have occurred is displayed. 5. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
4. Touch the back button (top left) to return to the diagnostics screen.
5. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
Description The Serial No., Product No., and Billing Counter are held at the following three locations
respectively:
Each NVM item is identified using an NVM chain link number in the form XXX-XXX.
• MCU PWBA (IOT).
Procedure • EMMC card (SEEP Data SYS1) on the ESS PWBA.
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1. • Soldered NVM (NVM Data SYS2) on the ESS PWBA.
2. Touch dC131 NVM Read/Write. NOTE: Be aware of the following:
3. To read NVM, enter the required chain link number. The current value will be displayed. • This function must only be used when a failure has occurred.
4. To write NVM: • When the three values (IOT, SYS1, SYS2) are the same, there is no need to continue with
a. Enter the required chain link number. this diagnostic function.
b. Touch Change. • When exiting the diagnostics after synchronizing the Serial No., the failure is cancelled.
c. Enter a new value.
Procedure
d. Touch OK.
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
e. The new value will be displayed in the Current Value box.
2. Touch dC132 Device ID and Billing Data.
5. Touch the back button (top left) to return to the diagnostics screen.
3. Select the correct data area (IOT, SYS1 or SYS2). For example, if a new MCU PWBA
6. Exit diagnostics, GP 1. (IOT) was installed, touch SYS1 or SYS2 for entering the serial numbering in the next
NOTE: The Edoc CD must be in the CD drive to use the link below. step.
4. Follow the on screen instructions and enter the serial number, then touch OK.
For the NVM tables, refer to the NVM Document
5. Follow the on screen instruct i os and re-enter the serial number, then touch OK.
6. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
041.300 Side Cover Interlock Switch On / Off Chain-Link Component Name State Comments
041.301 Rear Cover Interlock Switch On / Off 093.200 Developer Motor Alarm On / Off
041.302 Front Cover Sensor On / Off 094.202 Waste Toner Box Full Sensor On / Off
042.200 LVPS Fan Fail On / Off Alarm signal
To print the internal test patterns that are stored in the device for checking image quality and 56 ProconPG(A4)/For isolating Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness.
isolating problems. problems.
57 ProconPG(A4)/For isolating Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness.
Procedure problems.
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1. 58 SD TP124600 (Black & Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness.
White Grid)/For alignment
2. Touch dC612 Print Test Pattern.
confirmation
3. Select the Pattern Number, Table 1. Select from the available options for the selected test
59 Whole-page Halftone (A4)/ Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness.
pattern, then set the values:
For defect/banding detec-
• Quantity tion. It is desirable that
• Paper Supply Color/Cin can be selected.
• Output Color Color: R/G/B/C/M/Y/K/3C/
• Cin% 4C/BW.
• Screen 60 Production banding Chart Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness.
(A4)/4 color HT band Com-
• 1 sided or 2 Sided
mon to Cin all colors. For
4. Touch the Start button. white line detection.
5. Touch the Close button to return to the diagnostics screen. 61 DrumPitch Halftone (A4)/For Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness.
6. Exit diagnostics, GP 1. isolating problems.
Pattern Numbers and Images 62 Ghost Chart/For isolating Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness.
problems.
NOTE: If the settings for a test pattern are wrong, the message appears: [Invalid parameter.
Please re-enter.] and the Print Test Pattern cannot be performed. In this case, change the set- 63 Color Regi (A4/For Measure- Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness.
ment)/For isolating prob-
tings and repeat the test print.
lems. HT for Cregi patch/
Table 1 includes the print test patterns commonly used to check image quality and isolate Ladder/FXBG For banding
problems. Test patterns 102 to 161 are for use on the DADF scanner. verification at half speed.
64 Color Regi Adjustment Chart Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness.
If directed to this procedure from an image quality RAP, click the following link to return to (A4)/For color Regi fine
IQ1Image Quality Entry RAP. adjustment in fast scan
direction.
Table 1 Test patterns 65 Pitch Confirmation Chart Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness.
No. Pattern name/Purpose Screen Settings (A4)/For isolating problems.
51 Total Chart (A4)/ SFP devel- Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness. 66 4-Color Confirmation Chart Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness.
opment. (A4)/For isolating problems.
52 Total Chart (A4)/SFP devel- Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness. 67 Toner Palette (A4)/For iso- Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness.
opment. lating problems.
53 Total Chart (A4)/SFP devel- Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness. 102 Procon PG/Binary Screen must be set to: Copy Error Diffusion
opment. 104 Calibration/Binary (For creat- Screen must be set to: Copy Error Diffusion
54 C-TRACS Confirmation PG Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness. ing originals)
(A4/Print)/For verifying the 106 Calibration/Binary (For con- Screen must be set to: Copy Error Diffusion
effect of calibration. firming gradation)
55 C-TRACS Confirmation PG Screen must be set to: Gradation, Standard or Fineness. 108 Highlight PG/Binary Screen must be set to: Copy Error Diffusion
(A4/Print) For verifying the 113 Pre IPS/FS Increment RGB Screen must be set to: Copy Error Diffusion
effect of calibration.
117 Pre IPS/SS Increment RGB Screen must be set to: Copy Error Diffusion
122 Pre IPS/Shading Data Color Screen must be set to: Copy Error Diffusion
NOTE: Before performing this adjustment, ensure that there are no problems with the IOT. The Procon On/Off Print consists of the following:
After performing the Calibration, only perform adjustment for density, especially highlight or • Procon On Print: This is a print mode that uses the current Procon Data with the Procon
central gradation when necessary. (Process Control) soft enabled and the Tone Reproduction Curve (TRC) adjustment
enabled.
Adjustment overview
• Procon Off print: This is a print mode that uses IOT features with the Procon routine fully
• The gradation adjustment amount can be set from the screen in 1/128 units (-128 to
turned off.
+127) for the low, medium and high gradation of each color Y, M, C and K. (0 indicates no
adjustment. + numbers increase the density, and - numbers reduce the density) Procedure
• The actual ADC-LUT change takes place during the ADC-LUT calculation after the next Procon On Print
ADC patch is created. Therefore, perform checking, e.g. by performing Procon On Print 1. Enter Service Diagnostics, GP 1.
output. 2. Touch dC939 Procon On / Off. The Procon On / Off Print screen is displayed.
• The switch (Target) on the screen can be used to individually set whether Tone Repro- 3. Touch Procon On / Off.
duction Curve (TRC) Adjustment applies to Print, Copy or both.
4. Load A4 or A3 paper into tray 1, then touch Start. The internal test pattern Pcon PG print
• Upon entering the adjustment screen, the M LUT (NVM Value) for the low, medium and is output and the results are displayed.
high gradation of each color (Y), (M), (C) and (K) and the status of the switch (Target) will
5. Check the image quality of the internal test pattern Pcon PG print.
be displayed.
6. Touch Close to return to the Procon On / Off Print screen.
• The M LUT (NVM Value) for each color can be changed on the adjustment screen.
Procon Off print
• None, Copy jobs only, or Copy & Print jobs is displayed for the status of the switch (Tar-
get). This setting can be changed from the screen. 1. Touch Procon Off Print.
• Touching the Adjust button updates the NVM according to the M LUT NVM Value and 2. Load A4 or A3 paper into tray 1, then touch Start. The internal test pattern Pcon PG print
is output and the results are displayed.
Target status are displayed on the screen.
3. Compare the output of the ProCon On and ProCon Off prints. Evaluate according to one
• Only the NVM for M LUT (NVM Value) and (Target) is updated. The ADC-LUT is not
of the following problem statements:
updated.
• The problem involves a single color, this is an indication that the imaging unit and/or
Procedure power supplies or ROS may be at fault.
NOTE: Ensure there are no problems with the IOT before performing this procedure. • The problem involves all colors, this is an indication that the 2nd BTR and/or transfer
belt assembly may be at fault.
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
• The ProCon Off print is OK, but ProCon On print is unacceptable, this is an indica-
2. Touch dC924 TRC Adjust. The TRC Adjust screen is displayed.
tion that the CTD sensor assembly may be at fault.
3. Change the respective low density, medium density and high density output of each color
4. Touch Close to return to the Procon On / Off print screen.
Y, M, C and K (Black) with a value from the range -128 to +127, then touch Adjust. Visu-
5. Touch the back button (top left) to return to the diagnostics screen.
ally check the copy is to the customer’s required image quality.
6. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
If necessary repeat steps 2 and 3 until the customer is satisfied with the image quality.
4. Touch Target.
Select one of the targets that follow to apply the TRC adjustment.
• None
• Copy jobs only
• Copy & Print jobs
5. Touch the back button (top left) to return to the diagnostics screen.
6. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
Procedure Procedure
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1. 1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch dC1010 Signals Sending Test. 2. Touch dC1011 Relay On/Off Test.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen, then tap the Send Signals. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen, then touch Relay On.
4. Touch the Back button (top left) to return to the diagnostics screen. 4. To switch off a relay, touch Relay Off.
5. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
NOTE: If a fault occurs, a fault code will be displayed.
5. Touch the back button (top left) to return to the diagnostics screen.
6. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
The tag matrix for the IOT is affixed to the chassis inside the Front Door.
Classification Codes
A tag number may be required to identify differences between parts that cannot be inter-
changed, or differences in diagnostic, repair, installation, or adjustment procedures.
A tag number may also be required to identify the presence of optional hardware, special non-
volatile memory programming, or whether mandatory modifications have been installed. Each
tag number is given a classification code to identify the type of change that the tag has made.
The classification codes and their descriptions are listed in Table 1.
Change Tags
There are no Change Tags currently in effect for this product.
Wiring Diagrams
System Wiring Diagrams................................................................................................. 7-15
To locate a PJ, go to the appropriate table 28 Figure 5 J-164 MCU PWBA and fuser assembly WD 5
• C405 P/J Connections, Table 1. 29 Figure 5 J-164 MCU PWBA and LVPS WD 4,
WD 5
• C400 P/J Connections,Table 2.
30 Figure 5 H-163 MCU PWBA and LVPS WD 4
Location Maps for Plug Jack Connectors
33 Figure 5 H-164 MCU PWBA and developer motor WD 6
• P/J Locations Drives C405, Figure 1.
36 Figure 5 I-165 MCU PWBA and ROS scanner motor WD 8
• P/J Locations Paper Path C405, Figure 2.
38 Figure 5 J-163 MCU PWBA and exit clutch 2 (exit drive WD 15
• P/J Locations CRUM and ROS C405, Figure 3.
assembly)
• P/J Locations Fuser and LVPS C405, Figure 4.
39 Figure 5 J-164 MCU PWBA and 550 option feed clutch WD 11
• P/J Locations Rear and Left Side PWBAs C405, Figure 5.
40 Figure 5 J-163 MCU PWBA and exit clutch 1 (drive assembly WD 9,
• P/J Locations 550 Option Tray C405, Figure 6. exit) WD 15
• P/J Locations Drives C400, Figure 7. 40 Figure 4 B-158 LVPS and MCU PWBA, ESS PWBA WD 4,
• P/J Locations Paper Path C400, Figure 8. WD 9
• P/J Locations CRUM and ROS C400, Figure 9. 41 Figure 4 A-157 LVPS and rear interlock switch WD 4
• P/J Locations Fuser and LVPS C400, Figure 10. 42 Figure 4 A-157 LVPS and front interlock switch WD 4
• P/J Locations Rear and Left Side PWBAs C400, Figure 11. 43 Figure 4 A-158 LVPS and top harness assembly WD 4,
• P/J Locations 550 Option Tray C400, Figure 12. WD 8
47 Figure 4 H-157 LVPS and fuser harness assembly WD 5
Table 1 Plug / Jack locations C405 devices 48 Figure 4 H-158 LVPS and inlet harness assembly WD 4
Wiring 101 Figure 5 B-163 EMMC card and ESS PWBA WD 9
P/J Map Coordinates Connection Details Diagram 112 Figure 3 H-139 ROS assembly and ESS PWBA WD 8,
1 Figure 6 G-183 Not Connected - WD 9
10 Figure 5 H-164 MCU PWBA and ESS PWBA WD 9 121 Figure 3 G-139 Transfer CRUM connector (Y) and CRUM WD 13
xerographic harness assembly
11 Figure 5 I-165 MCU PWBA and ROS assembly WD 8
122 Figure 3 F-139 Transfer CRUM connector (M) and CRUM WD 13
12 Figure 5 J-163 MCU PWBA and transfer CRUM connectors Y, WD 13
xerographic harness assembly
M, C, and K
123 Figure 3 F-139 Transfer CRUM connector (C) and CRUM WD 13
13 Figure 5 I-164 MCU PWBA and color toner density (CTD) WD 13
Sensor (via inline connector PJ131) xerographic harness assembly
14 Figure 5 H-163 MCU PWBA and upper dispenser motor WD 14 124 Figure 3 E-140 Transfer CRUM connector (K) and CRUM WD 13
xerographic harness assembly
assembly
15 Figure 5 I-163 MCU PWBA and stack full and exit sensors WD 15
Figure 4 P/J locator map-fuser and LVPS Figure 5 P/J locator map-rear and left side PWBAs
Figure 6 P/J locator map-550 option tray Figure 7 P/J locator map-drives
Figure 10 P/J locator map-fuser and LVPS Figure 11 P/J locator map-rear and left side PWBAs
Wiring diagrams are an aid to trace wiring faults. This section shows the system wiring dia- Chain Diagram Connection Details
grams for the C400 and C405 devices including the 550 Option feeder tray. Controller Figure 10 Wiring Diagram 10: Interconnection Wiring; Controller (C400).
C400 Table 8 Connections of PWBA ESS with PWBA MCU. Connections of
Refer to Table 1 for a list of the wiring diagrams and the connection details shown in each dia- PWBA ESS with PWBA LVPS. Connections of PWBA ESS with
gram. PWBA ESS. Connections of PWBA ESS with ROS ASSY. Con-
nections of PWBA ESS with EMMC CARD. Connections of
Table 1 Wiring diagrams and connection details PWBA ESS with UI console assembly. Connections of PWBA
Chain Diagram Connection Details ESS with UI speaker.
Paper trans- Figure 11 Wiring Diagram 11: Interconnection Wiring; Paper Transport.
Device Figure 1 Wiring Diagram 1: System wiring; Cooling, AC Power, Fusing,
port Table 9 Connections of registration clutch assembly with PWBA MCU.
system (1 of 3) Drive, Laser, Controller.
Connections of registration chute assembly with PWBA MCU.
Device Figure 2 Wiring Diagram 2: System wiring; MSI, Transport, HVPS, Xero- Connections of 550 Option feed clutch assembly with PWBA
system (2 of 3) graphic, Developer, Exit, 550 Option Feeder.
MCU. Connections of duplex clutch assembly with PWBA MCU.
Device Figure 3 Wiring Diagram 3: System wiring; Scanner, ROS.
HVPS Figure 12 Wiring Diagram 12: Interconnection Wiring; HVPS.
system (3 of 3)
Table 10 Connections of HVPS Xero deve with PWBA HVPS TR. Connec-
Power regula- Figure 4 Wiring Diagram 4: Interconnection Wiring; AC Power. tions of HVPS Xero deve with PWBA MCU.
tion and distri- Table 2 Connections of PWBA LVPS with PWBA MCU. Connections of Xerographics Figure 13 Wiring Diagram 13: Interconnection Wiring; Xerographics.
bution inlet harness assembly with PWBA LVPS. Connections of main
Table 11 Connections of Xero deve CRU ASSY Y with PWBA MCU. Con-
fan with LVPS. Connections of rear interlock switch with PWBA
nections of Xero deve CRU ASSY M with PWBA MCU. Connec-
LVPS. Connections of door interlock switch with PWBA LVPS. tions of Xero deve CRU ASSY C with PWBA MCU. Connections
Connections of PWBA MCU with toner full sensor.
of Xero deve ASSY K with PWBA MCU. Connections of CTD
Fuser Figure 5 Wiring Diagram 5: Interconnection Wiring; Fusing. Sensor with PWBA MCU. Connections of PWBA EEPROM
Table 3 Connections of fuser assembly with PWBA LVPS. Connections XPRO with PWBA MCU.
of fuser assembly with PWBA MCU. Connections of PWBA Developer Figure 14 Wiring Diagram 14: Interconnection Wiring; Developer.
LVPS with PWBA MCU.
Table 12 Connections of toner cartridge Y with PWBA MCU. Connections
Drive Figure 6 Wiring Diagram 6: Interconnection Wiring; Drive. of toner cartridge M with PWBA MCU. Connections of toner car-
Table 4 Connections of main drive assembly with PWBA MCU. Connec- tridge C with PWBA MCU. Connections of toner cartridge K with
tions of main drive assembly with PWBA LVPS. PWBA MCU. Connections of toner dispense motor (Y, M) with
MSI Figure 7 Wiring Diagram 7: Interconnection Wiring; MSI. PWBA MCU. Connections of toner dispense motor (C, K) with
Table 5 Connections of MSI detect sensor with PWBA MCU. Connec- PWBA MCU. Connections of front cover sensor with PWBA
tions of MSI no paper sensor with PWBA MCU. Connections of MCU
main drive assembly with PWBA MCU. Connections of MSI feed Exit Figure 15 Wiring Diagram 15: Interconnection Wiring; Exit.
solenoid with PWBA MCU. Table 13 Connections of exit sensor with PWBA MCU. Connections of
ROS Figure 8 Wiring Diagram 8: Interconnection Wiring; ROS. stack full sensor with PWBA MCU. Connections of exit Clutch 1
Table 6 Connections of ROS ASSY with PWBA MCU. Connections of with PWBA MCU. Connections of exit Clutch 2 with PWBA MCU.
ROS ASSY with PWBA LVPS. Optional 550 Figure 16 Wiring Diagram 16: Interconnection Wiring; 550 Feeder.
Controller Figure 9 Wiring Diagram 9: Interconnection Wiring; Controller (C405). cassette Table 14 Connections of feeder PWBA with PWBA MCU. Connections of
C405 Table 7 Connections of PWBA ESS with PWBA MCU. Connections of registration clutch assembly with 550 Option feeder PWBA. Con-
PWBA ESS with PWBA LVPS. Connections of PWBA ESS with nections of 550 Option main feed assembly with 550 Option
PWBA ESS. Connections of PWBA ESS with ROS ASSY. Con- feeder PWBA. Connections of 550 Option feed clutch assembly
nections of PWBA ESS with PWBA Fax. Connections of PWBA with 550 Option feeder PWBA. Connections of 550 Option size
ESS with EMMC card. Connections of PWBA ESS with UI con- switch assembly with 550 Option feeder PWBA. Connections of
sole assembly. Connections of PWBA ESS with speaker assem- 550 Option drive assembly with 550 Option feeder PWBA.
bly. Scanner Figure 17 Wiring Diagram 17: Interconnection Wiring; Scanner.
Connections of scanner assembly with PWBA ESS. Connections
of scanner assembly with UI console. Connections of PWBA
ESS with PWBA USB HUB. Connections of UI console with
PWBA USB HUB.
Refer to Table 11
for signal line
names and
descriptions.
Charging
In the charging process, the surface of the drum rotating at a constant speed is uniformly
charged with negative polarity by the discharge from the Bias Charge Roll (BCR). This process Figure 3 Charging
is performed in parallel for the colors yellow, magenta, cyan and black.
This process is performed in parallel for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black colors, Figure 4.
• Laser beams are emitted from the LD (Laser Diode) for each color, they pass through a
lens, mirror and filter system then illuminate the polygon mirror. The laser beams (one for
each color) are reflected by the polygon mirror through two lenses, reflected by the mir-
rors and the irradiated to the drums of each color.
• The polygon mirror, appointed with six reflecting mirror faces, is rotated by the scanner
motor. Thus, the laser beam irradiated is scanned in the drum axis direction, by changes
of reflection angle of the polygon mirror. Scanning is performed using one reflecting mirror
face for each line.
• The laser beam deflected to the farthest point among the laser beams is reflected by the
polygon mirror onto the Start Of Scan (SOS) mirror, and then reflected onto the SOS sen-
sor. The SOS sensor generates the scanning standard signal by the incidence of the
laser beam. The SOS sensor signals are used to synchronize the starting point of the
laser-beam scanning with the starting point of the image writing.
• The Raster Output Scanner (ROS) assembly interprets printing data signals from the ESS
PWBA then irradiates the laser beams onto the surface of the drum to create a latent
image. The laser scans from one end of the drum surface to the other while being turned
off and on forming a single line of a latent image. The laser diode only lights up for areas
of the drum to be developed by toner. The drum surface irradiated by the laser beams
becomes a conductor, and the negative charge on the drum surface flows to the positive
side. The charges cancel each other out causing the potential on the drum surface to
drop. Areas on the drum surface where the potential drops become the electrostatic latent
image. The scanner motor turns on when it receives a signal, and turns off after printing
ends. The motor remains off in the standby and power-saving states, Figure 5.
Development
In the xerographic development assembly the incoming toner is mixed with the existing devel-
oper material (toner/carrier mixture) by the auger and then supplied to the magnet roll located
near the drum surface. The toner and carrier are charged by friction due to agitation (toner in
negative, carrier in positive), and they attract each other electrically. The carrier, due to its
magnetic properties, is attracted to the magnet roll, and then uniformly leveled by the trimmer
Figure 5 Latent image formation
rod, Figure 7.
Development The Magnet Roll is covered by a thin semi-conductive sleeve all over the surface. The DB
The development process makes a visible image appear on the drum surface by electrically (Developing Bias) voltage is supplied to this semiconductor sleeve from the High Voltage
attracting toner particles to the electrostatic latent image. Power Supply (HVPS). The DB voltage is negative DC voltage combined with AC voltage. The
DC voltage keeps the magnet roll at a constant negative voltage against the photoreceptor
This process is performed in parallel for the colors yellow, magenta, cyan and black indepen- layer of the drum. Therefore, in the area where the negative electric charge on the drum sur-
dently. face does not decrease, the potential is lower than that of the magnet roll, while the potential is
higher than that of the magnet roll in the area where the negative charge on the drum surface
Toner dispensing decreases. The AC voltage shakes the developer on the surface of the magnet roll so that the
The toner in the in each of the 4 toner cartridges is fed into the respective xerographic develop- toner easily flies to the drum. Thus, only the portions of the drum surface where the negative
ment assembly (imaging unit) by the auger in the dispenser assembly and the paddle in the charge has decreased below that of the magnet roll (electrostatic latent image) attract the toner
toner cartridge, driven by the dispenser motor, Figure 6. to form an image on the drum. Once the toner is deposited on the drum, the potential and the
toner-attracting force of the corresponding portion decreases because the increase of negative
charge lowers the potential at that portion, Figure 7.
Figure 7 Developer
BCR Cleaning
The remaining toner is roiled by a cleaning roll (made of spongy material) in contact with the
BCR surface, and then collected to the drum. The toner returned to the drum is scraped off by
the drum cleaning blade, Figure 10.
Figure 12 Neutralization
Belt cleaning
The excess toner that was not transferred to the print medium in the secondary transfer pro-
cess remains on the IBT surface. To prevent the excess toner from causing trouble in the sub-
sequent processes, the toner is scraped off by a cleaning blade in contact with the IBT surface,
and then is collected into the waste box assembly, refer to Figure 13.
Figure 14 Fusing
The drum cleaning auger and the belt cleaning auger are driven by the main motor. Document Scanning at the IIT
Document scanning at the IIT is performed by the carriage assembly within the IIT.
The excess toner fed to the waste box assembly is collected into the box by the waste auger in
the waste box assembly.
The carriage assembly consists of the CIS image sensor for converting image to data, the LED
array lamp for illuminating the original, and the rod scope for converting the original image to a
The waste auger in the waste box assembly is driven by the PH Motor via the gear from the
full-size image, Figure 1.
drive shaft assembly, Figure 15.
The nudger roller and the feed roller are rotated by the torque of the PH motor via the feed
clutch assembly.
The retard roller, pressed from underneath by the spring pressure and forced to the feed roller,
plays the role of fanning a sheet by the rotation friction.
When the sheet is lapped over, the break force of the torque limiter combined with the retard
roller separates and feeds only the sheet on the top.
The bottom plate assembly is the mechanism driven by the gear located on the side of the
paper cassette. Unless the interlock gear is unlocked, the bottom plate assembly keeps the
state that it is not lowered or elevated from the arbitrary position. The sheet is fed at this posi-
tion.
As the media feed is proceeded and several sheets of paper on the top of the paper loaded are
decreased, the nudger roller lowers down and the lever unlocks the gear, and then the bottom
plate assembly is elevated.
As the feed roller rotates, the MSI Left cam and MSI Right cam also rotate to lift the bottom
plate assembly via the left arm and right arms to the sheet feeding position.
Normally, when only one sheet is fed, both the feed roller and retard roller rotate to allow the
sheet to pass. However, when two sheets are fed concurrently, only the feed roller rotates and
the retard roller is locked thereby allowing the upper sheet to pass by being separated from the
lower sheet that is stopped by the friction of the retard roller at rest.
To avoid this problem, the lead edge position of the sheet is corrected at the registration sec- Feeding from the registration section
tion before the sheet is forwarded to the toner transfer section. By thrusting the edge of the
After the lead edge position of a sheet has been corrected in the registration section, at the
sheet against the locked regi roll the lead edge position of the sheet is corrected, Figure 6.
proper timing it is fed to the toner transfer section by the rotation of the regi roll. The regi roll is
rotated by the drive from the PH motor via the registration clutch assembly.
• ROS Assembly
• Drives
• NOHAD & Waste Toner
• Dispenser
• Xerographics and Transfer
• Fusing
• Paper Transport
• MSI
• Exit
• Electrical (C405)
• Electrical (C400)
• 550 Option Feeder
• UI console Assembly
• FAX
• Scanner
ROS Assembly
The ROS assembly is an exposure unit that outputs laser beams to form an electrostatic latent
image on the drum surface, Figure 1.
The dispenser assembly Y, M, C, K feeds the toner in the toner cartridges to the developer.
Figure 4 Dispenser
• Drum
Forms the static latent image and the toner image.
• BCR
Bias Charging Roller (BCR) charges the drum.
• Cleaning Roll
Cleans toner on the BCR surface.
• Cleaning Blade
Cleans the remaining toner from the drum after the toner image is transferred onto the
sheet.
• Magnet Roll
Contacts with the drum and forms the toner image on the drum.
• Auger
Stirs toner.
• Trimmer Rod
Regulates toner and carrier pile height on the magnet roller.
Transfer belt assembly (IBT)
The primary transfer unit that transfers the toner image on the drum surface of each color to
the intermediate transfer belt, Figure 5.
Duplex clutch
Transfers the drive of the PH motor to the duplex roll inside the duplex assembly.
Figure 8 MSI
The 550 option main feed assembly consists of the following components:
The UI speaker generates synchronised operational sounds for the UI console. The UI speaker
• No paper sensor. By change of the actuator position, signals the absence of paper in the is attached to the side of main device
paper cassette
• Registration sensor. Detects that the lead edge of a sheet has reached the registration Figure 13. The User Interface (UI) consists of the components that follow:
section. • LCD touch screen
550 Option registration clutch assembly • LED energy saver button
Transfers the drive of the 550 option drive assembly to the 550 option registration roll. • Home button
• LED machine status display
• NFC response LED
• ICCR storage garage
Figure 15 Fax
Load paper in the paper cassette, then adjust the left guide assembly, right guide assembly,
and end guide assembly to the paper size. Linked with the end guide assembly, the position of
the size slot plate is changed, and the three size actuators on the side of the cassette depress
the size switch assembly. The detected paper size corresponds to the combination of actua-
tors depressing the size switch.
Cooling Down
During the printing cycle, if the temperature of the heat roll becomes nonuniform between the
area that contacts the sheet and the area that does not, paper feeding is suspended for a cer-
tain duration to compensate for the temperature non uniformity of the heat roll. This is called
cooling down. When the temperature of the heat roll end is high, cooling down is performed to
lower the temperature to the target value.
Reference data (obtained by reading image data from a white reference plate via the CIS
image sensor) for adjustment is collected and used to perform compensation on the read
image data. Compensation includes shading compensation, white variation compensation, and
black variation compensation. These adjustment and compensation steps are described
below:
• AGC (Auto Gain Control): White Level Variation Adjustment
During AGC, the scanner assembly is moved to the position of the white reference strip,
and the exposure lamp is illuminated. The light reflected from the white reference strip is
read by the CIS image sensor as the white reference value, which is used to adjust CIS
image sensor output.
• AOC (Auto Offset Control)
AOC is performed by turning off the exposure lamp after AGC. This state is read by the
CIS image sensor as the black reference value, which is used to adjust CIS image sensor
output. (The order of AGC and AOC adjustment depends on the model.)
• Shading Compensation
Shading compensation compensates for pixel-by-pixel sensitivity variations and the non
uniformity of lamp light in the fast scanning direction. The AGC and AOC adjustment val-
ues are used to compensate for the image data read by the CIS image sensor.
The scanner splits the image into a fine grid, then reads the brightness (white/black) of each
cell. This operation is called scanning. The white/black information is converted to a digital sig-
nal: bright cells become 1, dark cells 0.
The digital signal from a scanned image is subjected to DA conversion (modulation) by the
control circuit to enable transmission over an analog telephone line. After conversion, the data
is sent as an analog signal. The audible sound during transmission is image data that has
become an analog signal.
The analog signal arriving over the telephone line is then subjected to AD conversion (demod-
ulation) by the control circuit of the receiving FAX machine, and restored to a digital signal.
The black/white information obtained from the AD conversion is sent to the printer, where black
cells are reproduced on the paper at the positions where they were on the original.
Because this image data is a set of digital signals, it cannot be transmitted using an analog
telephone line. It must be subjected to DA conversion (modulation). Also, the receiving FAX
machine must perform AD conversion to restore the incoming digital data to analog data.
DA conversion, analog signal transmission, analog signal reception, and AD conversion are all
performed by a modem (modulator/demodulator) in the control circuit. A modem consists of a
network control unit (NCU) for connecting to the telephone line and an A/D conversion unit for
performing DA and AD conversions.
NOTE: The control circuit also retains other important functions such as data compression and
memory. With data compression, any part of the scanned image data that consists of continu-
ous white or black pixels is encoded into a single element, thus compressing the volume of
data. Memory temporarily stores data during transmission and reception.
Printer
The printer prints image data from the control circuit onto the surface of paper. The principle is
the same as that of an ordinary printer in that black is applied to specified locations on the
paper.
Fault Occurs
Test the copy function of the device. If the printing results of the copy function are correct, the
probability of a fault in the FAX itself is low. The fault is likely in the telephone line or receiving
FAX. Retry sending the FAX, if there is no improvement assume the fault is in the telephone
line and contact the telephone company.
Figure 2 Fax system detail
If the printing results of the copy function are incorrect, it can be determined if the fault is in the
scanner or printer by operating each unit separately via a computer.
• Send Fault
• Receive Fault
• Other Problems
NOTE: If the telephone line condition is degraded, white horizontal lines, missing rows, and/or • DSL (Digital Subscriber Line)
cut-off top/bottom may occur. • Noise
Branch Connection (Parallel Connection)
NOTE: Branch connections or an incoming call (call waiting) may cause image corruption.
1. Problem with print quality at receiving FAX, such as corrupt image, lines in image, top/ During FAX reception, if the handset of another telephone on a branch connection is lifted, the
bottom cut off. received image may be corrupted or a transmission error may occur. Branch connection may
also interfere with caller identification, call waiting, the receiving operation of connected tele-
a. If the copy function is normal.
phones.
Cause: Degraded telephone line connection caused by noise, etc.; or a fault in the
printer of the receiving FAX. Call Waiting
Corrective Action: Determine whether fault is in telephone line or at receiving FAX by
trying copy function at receiving FAX. If a call comes in during FAX sending/reception, as with branch connections the image may be
b. If the copy function is faulty. corrupted.
Cause: Dirt or fault in the scanner.
Corrective Action: Clean platen glass or the repair scanner. If the original is being DSL (Digital Subscriber Line)
sent from the DADF, try executing a copy with the original placed on the platen
DSL, a high-speed digital transmission method using existing telephone lines, has several
glass. If this solves the problem, the fault is in the DADF.
types. These include ADSL (Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line) with differing upstream and
2. Cannot dial. downstream transmission speeds, SDSL (Symmetric Digital Subscriber Line) with symmetrical
Cause: Incorrect connection. Incorrect setup of dial type and/or line type. upstream and downstream transmission speeds, and VDSL (Very high bit rate Digital Sub-
Corrective Action: Correct the connection. Reset the dial type and/or line type to correct scriber Line) which features higher speed. However, because the line is used for both voice
settings. and data transmission, various problems may occur, such as noise during spoken conversa-
Receive Fault tion, low sound volume, and mis-dialing. Replacing the splitter may improve the situation.
NOTE: If the telephone line condition is degraded, white horizontal lines, missing rows, and/or Noise
cut-off top/bottom may occur.
NOTE: Branch connections or incoming call (call waiting) may also cause image corruption. If electronic equipment (television, computer, microwave, etc.) or devices equipped with
motors are located near a FAX, noise from them may degrade the line condition.
1. Problem with printing quality, such as corrupt image, lines in image, top/bottom cut off.
a. If copy function is normal. Because FAX data is audio data, the line quality affects the quality/stability of image data as
well as that of conversation.
Cause: Degraded telephone line connection caused by noise, etc.; or a fault in the
scanner of the sending FAX.
Corrective Action: Determine whether fault is in telephone line or at sending FAX by
trying copy function at receiving FAX.
b. If copy function is faulty.
Cause: Dirt or fault in printer.
Corrective Action: Clean all parts of printer or repair printer.
NOTE: If a call is made to the FAX from a telephone, and the FAX does not emit its ringing
sound, a telephone line fault is highly probable.
Micro switches
Micro switches are used primarily as cover interlocks in the printer. They are in a normally
open state, and close when actuated. A bank of micros witches is used to detect media size in
the universal trays. Micro switches also employ hooks or catches for retention in the bracket or
frame. Figure 1 shows Interlock Switch locations.
Figure 1 shows interlock switch locations. Figure 2 shows sensor locations in the media path.
Product Description
*Model No. or Product Name:
List damaged and affected part(s) of the machine by description and part number:
Customer Identification
*Customer Name: *Name of Customer Contact Person:
Fax:
* Required information is preceeded by asterisk, title shown in red, with a tan wash background
Details of Incident
*Description Of Incident: (Check all that apply)
Smoke
Describe quantity and duration of smoke:
Other, describe:
MANDATORY DESCRIPTION (above): Provide a detailed description of all valid factors that may have
contributed to the incident. Hardware involved in the incident should be preserved and retained for further
investigation should investigation be deemed necessary by EH&S.
LIST INCIDENT DESCRIPTIONS AND SUPPORT DIAGRAMS/DATA INCLUDED OR ATTACHED:
*Did external emergency response provider(s) such as a fire department, ambulance, etc. respond?
No Yes Identify: (i.e., source, names of individuals)
Apparent cause of incident (identify part that is suspected to be responsible for the incident)
* Required information is preceeded by asterisk, title shown in red with a tan wash background
JOB TITLE:
DATE: